Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit D18-0076 - KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY - OFFICES
KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY 700 ANDOVER PARK W D18-0076 Parcel No: Address: Project Name: 0 City of Tukwila O Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.Aov DEVELOPMENT PERMIT 2623049124 Permit Number: 700 ANDOVER PARK W KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Issue Date: Permit Expires On: D18-0076 9/24/2018 3/23/2019 Owner: Name: Address: Contact Person: Name: Address: Contractor: Name: Address: License No: Lender: Name: Address: KC HOUSING AUTH 600 ANDOVER PARK WEST, SEATTLE, WA, 98188 HEATH MAC COY Phone: (206) 315-4395 700 ANDOVER PARK W , TUKWILA, WA, 98188 PETE ALMOND DEVELOPMENT Phone: CONSTRUCTION LLC 207 BROADWAY 300, TACOMA, WA, 98402 PETEAAD91802 Expiration Date: 9/22/2019 KC HOUSING AUTHORITY 600 ANDOVER PARK W , TUKWILA, WA, 98188 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: TENANT IMPROVEMENT OF EXISTING MAINTENANCE STORAGE AREA. AREA IS TO BE CONVERTED INTO OFFICES AND OPEN OFFICE SPACES WITH CUBICLES. Project Valuation: $245,000.00 Type of Fire Protection: Sprinklers: YES Fire Alarm: YES Type of Construction: IIIB Electrical Service Provided by: TUKWILA Fees Collected: $4,851.07 Occupancy per IBC: B Water District: TUKWILA Sewer District: TUKWILA Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: International Residential Code Edition: International Mechanical Code Edition: Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: International Fuel Gas Code: 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 National Electrical Code: WA Cities Electrical Code: WAC 296-46B: WA State Energy Code: 2017 2017 2017 2015 Public Works Activities: Channelization/Striping: Curb Cut/Access/Sidewalk: Fire Loop Hydrant: Flood Control Zone: Hauling/Oversize Load: Land Altering: Landscape Irrigation: Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Water Main Extension: Water Meter: Volumes: Cut: 0 Fill: 0 Number: 0 No Permit Center Authorized Signature: /:� ,a((ii-C-Wi- Date: d1/%1/// g I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit and agree to the conditions attached to this permit. Signature: LL anti- oQx2 Date: 61. le -c4-1( 4. Print Name: k'CVA$j C1/4 -0022.A - This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: ***BUILDING PERMIT CONDITIONS*** 2: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted for approval. 3: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 4: The special inspections and verifications for concrete construction shall be as required by IBC Chapter 17, Table 1705.3. 5: The special inspections for steel elements of buildings and structures shall be required. All welding shall be done by a Washington Association of Building Official Certified welder. 6: Installation of high-strength bolts shall be periodically inspected in accordance with AISC specifications. 7: The special inspection of bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete. 8: When special inspection is required, either the owner or the registered design professional in responsible charge, shall employ a special inspection agency and notify the Building Official of the appointment prior to the first building inspection. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official in a timely manner. 4 9: A final report documenting required special inspections and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted to the Building Official. The final inspection report shall be prepared by the approved special inspection agency and shall be submitted to the Building Official prior to and as a condition of final inspection approval. 10: New suspended ceiling grid and Tight fixture installations shall meet the seismic design requirements for nonstructural components. ASCE 7, Chapter 13. 11: Partition walls shall not be tied to a suspended ceiling grid. All partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced to the building structure. Such bracing shall be independent of any ceiling splay bracing. 12: Subgrade preparation including drainage, excavation, compaction, and fill requirements shall conform strictly with the recommendations given in the soils report. Special inspection is required. 13: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 14: Structural Observations in accordance with I.B.C. Section 1709 is required. At the conclusion of the work included in the permit, the structural observer shall submit to the Building Official a written statement that the site visits have been made and identify any reported deficiencies which, to the best of the structural observer's knowledge, have not been resolved. 15: Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 16: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 17: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 18: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 19: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. 20: Preparation before concrete placement: Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed unless a tremie is to be used or unless otherwise permitted by the building official. All debris and ice shall be removed from spaces to be occupied by concrete. 21: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 22: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). 23: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand- held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand-held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 24: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 25: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "ATI Purpose" (3A, 40B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 5.4) 28: The total number of fire extinguishers required for a light hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 3,000 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "all purpose" (2A, 10 B:C) dry chemical type. The travel distance to any extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 5.4) 26: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand- held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand-held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 27: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 29: Maintain fire extinguisher coverage throughout. 30: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1010.1.9) 31: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 32: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 33: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1010.1.9.1) 34: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1013.1) 35: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1013.6.1) 36: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on-site generator. (IFC 1013.6.3) 37: Emergency lighting facilities shall be arranged to provide initial illumination that is at least an average of 1 foot-candle (11 lux) and a minimum at any point of 0.1 foot-candle (1 lux) measured along the path of egress at floor level. Illumination levels shall be permitted to decline to 0.6 foot-candle (6 lux) average and a minimum at any point of 0.06 foot-candle (0.6 lux) at the end of the emergency lighting time duration. A maximum -to -minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40 to 1 shall not be exceeded. (IFC 1008.3.5) 41: Fire protection systems shall be maintained in accordance with the original installation standards for that system. Required systems shall be extended, altered or augmented as necessary to maintain and continue protection whenever the building is altered, remodeled or added to. Alterations to fire protection systems shall be done in accordance with applicable standards. (IFC 901.4) 39: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide. (NFPA 13-8.6.5.3.3) 38: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of Factory Mutual or any fire protection engineer licensed by the State of Washington and approved by the Fire Marshal prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance No. 2436). 42: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and City Ordinance #2437. 44: Maintain fire alarm system audible/visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible/visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2437) 43: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2437) (IFC 901.2) 45: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206-431-3670) is required for this project. 46: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 47: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.11 of the International Building Code. 40: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2436 and #2437) 48: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 49: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575-4407. PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 1700 BUILDING FINAL** 0301 CONCRETE SLAB 0611 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 0612 EXT ROOFING INSUL 1400 FIRE FINAL 0201 FOOTING 0409 FRAMING 0606 GLAZING 0502 LATH/GYPSUM BOARD 0401 ROOF SHEATHING 0603 ROOF/CEILING INSUL 4037 SI -CAST -IN-PLACE 4027 SI -COLD -FORM WELD 4046 SI-EPDXY/EXP CONC 4034 SI -METAL PLATE CONN 4035 SI -SOILS 4025 SI -STEEL CONST 4026 SI-STRUCT STEEL 4004 SI -WELDING 4032 SI -WOOD CONST c 0 0406 SUSPENDED CEILING 0601 WALL INSULATION 0413 WALL SHEATHING/SHEAR CITY OF TUKi A Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.TukwilaWA.gov Building Peat No. DI(e Project No Date Application Accepted: q) II (For office use only) Date Application Expires: CONSTRUCTION PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. **Please Print** SITE LOCATION King Co Assessor's Tax No.: Site Address: 700 Andover Park W. Tukila, WA 98188 Suite Number: New Tenant: Tenant Name: King County Housing Authority PROPERTY OWNER Name: Heath MacCoy Name: King County Housing Authority City: Tukwila State: WA Zip: 98188 Address: 700 Andover Park W Email: heathm@kcha.org City: Tukwila - State: WA Zip: 98188 CONTACT PERSON — person receiving all project communication Name: Heath MacCoy Address: 700 Andover Park W City: Tukwila State: WA Zip: 98188 Phone: (206) 315-4395 Fax: Email: heathm@kcha.org GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: TBD Company Name: Rice Fergus Miller Company Name: Architect Name: Greg Belding Address: Address: 275 Fifth Street, Suite 100 City: Bremerton State: WA City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Phone: Fax: Contr Reg No.: Email: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.: H:\Applications\Forms-Applications On Line \2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Floor: 1 ❑ Yes ® ..No ARCHITECT OF RECORD Name: 1! �N (j CM i 1 USI t4 Company Name: Rice Fergus Miller Company Name: Architect Name: Greg Belding City: 1 U `LPC State: \ f Address: 275 Fifth Street, Suite 100 City: Bremerton State: WA Zip: 98337 Phone: (360) 377-8773 Fax: Email: gbelding@rfmarch.com State: ENGINEER OF RECORD Name: 1! �N (j CM i 1 USI t4 p, M or 1II Company Name: City: 1 U `LPC State: \ f Engineer Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Email: LENDER/BOND ISSUED (required for projects $5,000 or greater per RCW 19.27.095) Name: 1! �N (j CM i 1 USI t4 p, M or 1II Address: 700 { r)o' 2.. ?p_ a City: 1 U `LPC State: \ f Zip: 6ts I gg Page 1 of 4 BIJILDING PERMIT INFORMATIO206-431-3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 245,000 Existing Building Valuation: $ Describe the scope of work (please provide detailed information): Tenant improvement of existing maintenance storage area. Area is to converted into offices and open office spaces with cubicles. Will there be new rack storage? ❑ Yes E.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes 0 No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: © Sprinlders lin Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes No If "yes attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2"x 11 "paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM 0 On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:\Applications\Fonns-Applications On Line \2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 2 of 4 Existing Interior Remodel Addition to Existing Structure New Type of Construction per IBC Type of Occupancy per IBC lst Floor 36,790 4,147 III -B B 2nd Floor 3rd Floor Floors thru Basement Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes 0 No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: © Sprinlders lin Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes No If "yes attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2"x 11 "paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM 0 On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:\Applications\Fonns-Applications On Line \2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 2 of 4 PUBLIC WORKS PERMIT INFO,ATION — 206-433-0179 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Call before you Dig: 811 Please refer to Public Works Bulletin #1 for fees and estimate sheet. Water District ❑ ...Tukwila ❑ ...Water District #125 0 ...Water Availability Provided Sewer District 0 ...Tukwila ❑ ...Sewer Use Certificate 0 .. Highline ❑ ...Valley View ❑ .. Renton ❑ ...Sewer Availability Provided El .. Renton ❑ .. Seattle Septic System: ❑ On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Submitted with Application (mark boxes which apply): 0 ...Civil Plans (Maximum Paper Size — 22" x 34") 0 ...Technical Information Report (Storm Drainage) 0 ...Bond 0 .. Insurance 0 .. Easement(s) Proposed Activities (mark boxes that apply): ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - Nonprofit for less than 72 hours ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - No Disturbance ❑ ...Construction/Excavation/Fill - Right-of-way El Non Right-of-way ❑ ❑ ...Total Cut ❑ ...Total Fill cubic yards cubic yards ❑ ...Sanitary Side Sewer ❑ ...Cap or Remove Utilities El ...Frontage Improvements ❑ ...Traffic Control 0 ...Backflow Prevention - Fire Protection Irrigation ❑ .. Geotechnical Report ❑ .. Maintenance Agreement(s) ❑ ...Traffic Impact Analysis ❑ ...Hold Harmless — (SAO) 0 ...Hold Harmless — (ROW) ❑ .. Right-of-way Use - Profit for less than 72 hours ❑ .. Right-of-way Use — Potential Disturbance 0 .. Work in Flood Zone O .. Storm Drainage ❑ .. Abandon Septic Tank ❑ .. Curb Cut ❑ .. Pavement Cut ❑ .. Looped Fire Line Domestic Water ❑ .. Grease Interceptor ❑ .. Channelization ❑ .. Trench Excavation ❑ .. Utility Undergrounding ❑ ...Permanent Water Meter Size... WO # ❑ ...Temporary Water Meter Size .. WO # ❑ ...Water Only Meter Size WO # ❑ ...Deduct Water Meter Size ❑ ...Sewer Main Extension Public 0 Private 0 ❑ ...Water Main Extension Public 0 Private 0 FINANCE INFORMATION Fire Line Size at Property Line Number of Public Fire Hydrant(s) 0 ...Water 0 ...Sewer 0 ...Sewage Treatment Monthly Service Billing to: Name: Day Telephone: Mailing Address: Water Meter Refund/Billing: Name: Mailing Address: City State Zip Day Telephone: City State Zip H:\Applications\Forms-Applications On Line \2011 Applications\Pennit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 3 of 4 [-PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES - Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNE Signature: Print Name: Mailing Address: 7co AGENT: Date: 3 4‘48' Day Telephone: 2 - 3/5 ' l/395 ork 7.04:114. tt)A -rawf?' City State Zip H:\Applications'Forms-Applications On Line \2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 4 of 4 Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID $139.73 D18-0076 Address: 700 ANDOVER PARK W Apn: 2623049124 $139.73 Credit Card Fee $4.07 Credit Card Fee R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 $4.07 DEVELOPMENT $135.66 ADDITIONAL PLAN REVIEW R000.345.830.00.00 1.00 $67.83 ADDITIONAL PLAN REVIEW TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R15767 R000.345.830.00.00 1.00 $67.83 $139.73 Date Paid: Monday, November 05, 2018 Paid By: MICHAEL CUADRA Pay Method: CREDIT CARD 070992 Printed: Monday, November 05, 2018 3:46 PM 1 of 1 SYSTEMS Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS ( ACCOUNT I QUANTITY I PAID $3,031.73, PermitTRAK D18-0076 Address: 700 ANDOVER PARK W Apn: 2623049124 $3,031.73 Credit Card Fee $88.30 Credit Card Fee R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 $88.30 DEVELOPMENT $2,803.48 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $2,798.98 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE B640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $139.95 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R14342 R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $139.95 $3,031.73 Date Paid: Wednesday, April 25, 2018 Paid By: MICHAEL CUADRA Pay Method: CREDIT CARD 047774 Printed: Wednesday, April 25, 2018 1:07 PM 1 of 1 CRWSYSTEMS Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID $2,065.61 D18-0076 Address: 700 ANDOVER PARK W Apn: 2623049124 $1,819.34 DEVELOPMENT $1,819.34 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.830.00.00 0.00 $1,819.34 M18-0037 Address: 700 ANDOVER PARK W Apn: 2623049124 $246.27 MECHANICAL $246.27 PLAN CHECK FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R14021 R000.322.102.00.00 0.00 $246.27 $2,065.61 Date Paid: Friday, March 16, 2018 Paid By: KC HOUSING AUTH Pay Method: CHECK 314819 Printed: Friday, March 16, 2018 12:49 PM 1 of 1 SYSTEMS • CO TUKWILA ETRAKIT 6200 SOUTHCENTER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 206-433-1870 CITY OF TUKWILA 0017340000802374464500 Date: 11/05/2018 03:45:15 PM VISA CARD NUMBER: TRAN AMOUNT: APPROVAL CD: RECORD #: CLERK ID: X CREDIT CARD SALE **********8721 K $139.73 070992 000 Rachelle {CARDHOLDER'S SIGNATURE} I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL AMOUNT ACCORDING TO THE CARD ISSUER AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT IF CREDIT VOUCHER) Thank you! Merchant Copy Page 1 of 2 %4-Frao•ilea vein nnnvssrrrPnw nnm/VirhialMpwhant/traneartinn rin9riicnatehMethnii= hrintTra 11 /5/201 R • CO TUKWILA ETRAKIT 6200 SOUTHCENTER BLVD TUKWILA, WA 98188 206-433-1870 CITY OF TUKWILA Date: 11/05/2018 03:45:15 PM CREDIT CARD SALE VISA CARD NUMBER: TRAN AMOUNT: APPROVAL CD: RECORD #: CLERK ID: **********8721 $139.73 070992 000 Rachelle Thank you! Customer Copy K Page 2 of 2 httos://classic. convergepay. com/VirtualMerchant/transaction.dc?dispatchMethodpriotTra... 11/5/2018 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO.. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION (206) 431 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Projec • // KL �!� `t� , f WGU.a, Type of Inspection: �t/l `1,4. Fii f4t Address:to 100 d W4+2(L “% Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: w—c q -t9 .. p.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Ej Corrections required prior to approval. MMENTS: Date: REINSPE ION F REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Inspector: Retain a copy with permit ECT N0. ERMIT NO. INSPECTION RECORD CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project:'4 Typi Inspectio/n:' , �% ��Nr/ Address' 7a /igitkrAvtPaikiiJ Da;1441%iug eee Called: ,� Special Instructions: Date Wanted: l—Q— iq a.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS:Z _ rG AiGPV4,00Z • ApPOPe/c2. Inspector: Jr ....5 Date: v Y n REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project gi ► L 144A4• Type of Inspection: L4 V t klf.L4d/t/ Address: 7 -7c1=' P414Z Date Called. -111 Special Instruction Date Wanted: /M9'e a.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Q Corrections required prior to approval. OMMENTS: fSdrl1 60.40.0 Inspector: Date: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 t'iO7G P�j� : Typ of Inspecti��, rin Adds:'1' ;fitiiiityikw pi, e Called: Special Instructions: Date ytecit — � a.m. m. P.m Req►(ester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: kQkLIO 'Awn* 0,4(s OfetwN) 114 44,f) Pet./ W)aH- Cti"- fr r 1-M11/) Z�- 3 UL,,,,e. Inspector: Date://z40/70/0 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD ( IN ON NO. 1 Retain a copy with permit LflgYx?7L PERMIT N . CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 (206) 431-3670 Project: L Type of Inspection: I /y� d r 044.ti) Dae ailed: (! pecial Instructions: Date Wanted: 11-1 -- a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: EJApproved per applicable codes. ,Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 6 4 Crw✓Ior G iv tar ✓k I 'ALS ko/). a-- �h,s _,7 n m/s ��ust/y� 41942 zeo A1 eed e teankriat s8N41 Ins pector: !1., (.9 Date /(19- REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. octet INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit D1 -� INSP ".NNO. PERMIT NO. CITY OFTUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Type of Inspection: AddressZkee. p4 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: /gp.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. 0Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: rti sir j,, tiscinss 6 • l .- e ' = iiv- eL - re, s,r. F E)cp ax.r WelefiK lnspector:3C 0.- Date: j/..8 °Jr REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 big -40 674 Project: 14 taq Co Type nspection: Addmis � �(�/ � 14pecial Date Called: Q 57f% L Ins ructions: Date Wanted: —�r 740/Er740/Erp.m. a.m. R�uester Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Q Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 4rhat A�i * Re,,.►s jos a0;" ZO6'� 2-07`---61t inspector t Date/ REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: k it s ♦ . 111. 11P4 • • Type of Inspection: • al 0.11L. ► _ __ ♦S►. 1 Addre 700 AOflo Ir.:4- D to Called:L P Rea444,/ Specialnstructioa Requester: Phone No: ElApproved per applicable codes. LJ Correctio rior to approval. COMMENTS: TikcAC,aT►oa - egooesue.�c.�— Inspector: Date: r REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD IrflPA py pRetain a co with ermit"b0-60760'-60760' NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: tP. Type Inspection: ddr��'"� s: �,i1-441/U � / OFA 1. 7t)d f Date Called: Special Instructions: ��` I t wl - (7,,c3)Requester:(9o- /77S3P Date W me r a.m. p.m. one No:: /KApproved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: lirrections required prior to approval. F f%dt()4)) • 1;e1c.(9 /.3 1,6 ae1 2�7 1•1 1 fe0,1j14.-2) ` k ktar * pony- c / .T apie)-64 * MAkt S vwL v_eTom. j'gyp-,_,4toat5 O Inspector: • Wip azAtt__ �' Date&—C ZO/Tie n REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. a INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Z1,8-0076 Project: si ,5 M"„"'1 Typef Inspection: �oo - Cr1 �Date 1 r Al e/ % SL(/is'r,+ QeV I S-ei Addrds:Kixrg 70D�WdAVCr ?Art V Called: 2v a Lie, 4 pi , �� Specia Instructions: Date Wanted: 10-23 -20 /8 a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 6h S N6 191,-, 1 r Al e/ % SL(/is'r,+ QeV I S-ei r006ir de -b4; LS Gf pi, dr ,,w 47A - 2v a Lie, 4 pi , 4)e -74v Se . ctal ( VI,sQUU {..-( 0pr/.,/CJs r�� r ���?v ifr L/ V Inspector3 Date:1D/z/zolr/ REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 57-6' 24'-0' 27-0' 24'-0' SEE SSK-1 FOR PIER FOOTING WHERE REQUIRED DUE TO LOW EXISTING FOOTING DEMOLISH ABOVE EK OPENING PER ARCH. TO RASE HEIGHT Say2 > EPDXY JOINING STEEL TO CONCRETE < * INSPECTION SHALL BE REQUIRED TO VERIFY APPROVED TYPE OF EPDXY AND STEEL OR BOLT SIZES AS SPECIFIED ON CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND/OR DOCUMENTS. * CALL FOR FOUNDATION INSPECTION BEFORE APPLYING EPDXY TO ALLOW INSPECTION OF HOLES DEPTH AND DUST REMOVAL. BUILDING OFFICIAL (INSPECTOR) SHALL OBSERVE INSTALLATION OF EPDXY AT THAT TIME. REVISIONS No changes sh !l rriairto-to-thF scope of work :vith,t rr'?I' Approval of Tukwila P'.1 n;Sti^inri VO T a_: '.17r,IStibrnIttal and 5-!I_. 1� -rr� '7j .i!. }:..1 r- .:771H' r FILE C7d' �...� 4 • .R • EET, SURE0 PLAN Flan revic 'i c !-- , , `ubjec:' FOUNDATION ,. cr,:i 275 FIFTH STREET, SURE 100 BREMERTON, WA 90337 380-3778773 RFMORCH.COM w U a_ m W 0) 2O toz 0 0 Vow Et ti RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA VVED Fcc OCT 2.5 2018 Approval of cons;; ct;on documents does not cuthorize the violation of any adopted coda or ordinance. Receipt of approved Field Copy and conditions it L VISiON -4— `S t: i 7- -L ! L: 1 a,• .i.., . j 1.5..-4 ,�„ � ❑11ca! Elcctr,cai ),Plumbing Gcs Piping City cf Tuk Ha 6- 1 MPLIANCF{RMil CENTER RQVED 0115 2018 PRO36CT# 517813402 PIAN NOTES: 1. SLAB -CH -GRADE SHALL BE 5" THICK MTH 6x6 112.9xY12.9 WV AT CENTER U.014. PROVIDE VAPOR BARKER PER SPECIFICATIONS BELOW SLAB AT NTBiIOR SPACES OVER FREE -DRAMS 6RANULAR FILL PER SPECIFICATIONS, SE ARCHITECTLRAL PRAWN65 FOR SLAB DEPRESSION AND SLOPE RECAREMENTS. 2 DEMOLISH WALL PER ARCA.. PROVE WALL STRtN6TNENM6 PER 18/5-7001UO.N. MINIIIIIIIIN PJ CONCRETE SLAB - SEE PLAN NOTE 1 - MATCH 655T1'46 SLAB THICKNESS AT NELL C.ONDRI0145, U.O.N. - 5ff 27/5-50.01 EK CONCRETE WALL THIS LEVEL SHEAR WALL THS LEVEL PER SCHEDULE OF 24/5-5001 EK CONCRETE WALL PANEL JOINT REVISION N0.(‘ 4)0/4 � ISSUE DATE 062.2018 AMASar WHIM! SMO 80002 2016E604 Saco CATE REVISION a 201543.29 030 PIER FOOTING .1-10.24 005 ALTERNATE FOUNDATION PLAN SHEET 8 S-20.01 COUGHLINPORTERLUNDEEN STRUCTURAL CIVIL SEISMIC ENGINEERING SSK-1 (3) ytou5 of 3 r h Ef'b)0' r�w6LS ren CSN I6, L 4. raL t MIN, cover. i )� \ifi4 U SMS RECEIVED 2L.° CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 252018 PERMIT CENTER REVISION NO, 2 DI Y/ OD1(i Project: VC- N/ 6L-06, goo. RE.,NOVA ► IO/V Project No. Client: Designed By: .C-'nl S Date: 10- 1 S -1 c& Checked By: Sheet of 801 SECOND AVENUE, SUITE 900 SEATTLE, WA 98104 / P 206.343.0480 f cplinc.com 8 COUGHLINPORTERLUNDEEN STRUCTURAL Cr. L. SEISMIC ENGINEERING FILO STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY 700 BUILDING OFFICE SPACE RENOVATION RICE FERGUS MILLER ARCHITECTS MARCH 15, 2018 S170134-02 b(9 007k' 801 SECOND AVE NUE; SUITE 903 SEATTLE REVIEINEDL CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR " 6 2018 City of fiukwiI. BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY CP TUKWILA MAR 161010 PERMIT CENTER PREPARED BY: Mike Armstrong P.E., S.E. William Stone A 98104 / P 20:5.343.0460 nc.com COUGHLINPORTERLUNDEEN NAME OF PROJECT STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS Table of Contents SECTION PAGE Seismic Criteria 3 Columns and beams for new openings 5 Mechanical Load on roof 7 Mechanical platform 9 COUGHLINPORTERLUNDEEN STRUCTURAL CIVIL SEISMIC ENGINEERING S'P 1„1„Q;;( CV I k. -1.G. *cc 4(-03 V = C = 1- C7 5 >< _ 0-681 - 65 G -1 C - J o% Sdeyz— rc 1 recvs.1 51,eA•C4I /zc f 1,n 6 ®.O2 )1'2°-45 (gs 0681 = --Y)S ) 0 V - o G 521 \,0od - d!/w./ / gi25d JO,,S F laQ C) ., ei; Faro cuF ltit 2-2/0,5 Wmils :fiecusa r we • e x - 150p1 J -e'11,1 = III 9 85 k sf uu 11 L e.ts 'I'N rk c.11 he 55 ©pa .l ,1 s ( /.) w e 5114 tv 11-e, (c.%Z 2 252 Jr. 6 70 G`% IS Batt I s o G'/4 � 2 5 ) 2 1 // Li 7 (0 l0'% c,A Z it �,✓rc.A 10?< I S4. +© 2 r loot 12" 4 !/spa/. 6(le-v) Project: 16,1 Project No. dui)j }iovs;•?� Client: Designed By: G V S Date: \ 1. 2 8. 1 Checked By: Sheet of 801 SECOND AVENUE, SUITE 900 SEATTLE, WA 98104 / P 206.343.0460 / cplinc.com 3 i 1 2 s 3 i u 1 Project: COUGHLINPORTERLUNDEEN STRUCTURAL CIVIL SEISMIC ENGINEERING >V - c768lx- ) TI ‘-ided to k , ass(#.*t Gil( loaf I N -S /mod =1 is .Li&e.- -uset L—& !f L = ()3-& . s- s 1, .f S 34.5 �? ce 6,.C4(/ A u S '.4 OK w 34 6.40\,?__ L-40 34 rVteci,"Gn Project No. Client: Designed By: Date: Checked By: Sheet of 801 SECOND AVENUE, SUITE 900 SEATTLE, WA 98104 / P 208.343.0460 / cplinc.com 4 COUGHLINPORTERLUNDEEN STRUCTURAL CIVIL SEISMIC ENGINEERING Check . c.c��ti�.�s OOF° 104.)s ati all i I/Ss SA )/ ha r-w1t,t) h-1�1► ©-t� r l.0), D.6g9 k n 2.5/,, P '5%1' C O (I4 w1 c 2 kr I y • 61,5:0.681 rp s co ISO(cf ,r 6 . 2s%x Li-. S 10 C r if ►2 ,. Ailto _ !o S ! `� k 1 ��h. OK 5 ;-15/Lec.�v. 1s = S. x _a___ x 15 X 1SL, JO x 21, 0 ,2" 4-J /1Pail-- 4ear'i r-Vc.y S��n 'j -ISS tx 5x34 hL h S = 1 Svk �is $ g/ �- s a& $ ` ruvA' sec Project: Project No. Client: Designed By: Date: Checked By: Sheet of 801 SECOND AVENUE, SUITE 900 SEATTLE, WA 98104 / P 208.343.0480 / cplinc.com 5 s 2 s v Project: COUGHLINPORTERLUNDEEN STRUCTURAL CIVIL SEISMIC ENGINEERING 6Q 0-3YQ• _ ©-'I lkl.( I,2 �L 4 LOC- D.zSt_ /V7� p �(k x12- - I 1-? • o-7 k-��- /),,) C j 'Z K 2. CJ - ; n S�LCG.�U^, Project No. Client: Designed By: Date: Checked By: Sheet of 801 SECOND AVENUE, SUITE 900 SEATTLE, WA 98104 / P 206.343.0460 / cplinc.com 6 COUGHLINPORTERLUNDEEN STRUCTURAL CIVIL SEISMIC ENGINEERING file -c, /vas evvP OL =Iles; /1ecA G. coAt e " L spOh G k 4' 1 Co e w 2.6.e 2 v c 2 x cP 1 b S,4 C»v % �-- �L LILT 1Z , wS = 2 ;), 2 (n),o l P L c? f (1,2, 14 4 �O" 2CA2 ) ¥124 G (oh' - 3. '? 5 ).g - (I.? art. ao•S, ) „g2 Cgeacs1,7 _ 4heCL,CI'151 S 1 - 0-95 kF = (12/(,)'" 0 r‘ - /2.(A9 �s -/ of .7/Y) ii © -ci. S, x 4- O c ci 7 X (0-'4 Y , ZL9,e 2 S-3 h -P OK 131 Project: Project No. Client: Designed By: Date: Checked By: Sheet of 801 SECOND AVENUE, SUITE 900 SEATTLE, WA 98104 / P 206.343.0460 / cp"inc.com 7 COUGHLINPORTERLUNDEEN STRUCTURAL CIVIL SEISMIC ENGINEERING tn,v. = (t + 2S ) v - CK' 23.54,E1�3 3 g4CI 2413 4-v4 G- I 1005 � 1 + t i \ Lz - - y J AGI L 4") iv+.�? z r235 -(2-1-1) 6f r 13,5 2,41 7 Sc.)°I G-1 61 = /700. 1r"/G3 2's21t0G1 1 7 - Qecer.i- Project: Project No. Client: Designed By: Date: Checked By: Sheet of 801 SECOND AVENUE, SUITE 900 SEATTLE; WA 98104 / P 208.343.0460 / cplinc.com 8 COUGHLINPORTERLUNDEEN STRUCTURAL CIVIL SEISMIC ENGINEERING /`'1 ci2cv ' & f c, -1 ate. I rA'� bI. - psi - t_ = S Oe s r 1(9 es n e 30 x !22.,!(, 4,00 10 4 (L iyWG.ihs L ^- Lit,/ % LAs' 61(.19 S162 -- ,2 (i - 514-, - $" Sf tc/s .5‘uo -COk t.b Van �-%Iwo tt I'4h ;e,,&) 0 cv ss (2) j -t) 13 to is 1 / SO,s: O' /OpsP/7, --ZGotl✓ ;r S C -hen :5 c Sit.tce% 11 s& 41L. w! i1 Cq cA OK by I t0 a. (.1 Veli -f) _ ) sf-x )O' v11 4cAD r# _ IS DO T# v = 0 (0%1w = (.9 C, sk tsoca = t - k 0-5,, 116,%1- /4, © -8s x 6,0 x ©- 2 3 2� h la /Gi to' 2 S it f" =7 OK Project: Project No. Client: Designed By: Date: Checked By: Sheet of 801 SECOND AVENUE, SUITE 900 SEATTLE, WA 98104 / P 206.343.0460 / cplinc.com 9 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 FPLC Technical Specification for: KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY 700 Building - Office Interior Remodel RFM Project No. 2017036 March 15, 2018 Prepared for: King County Housing Authority 700 Andover Park West Tukwila, Washington By: Rice Fergus Miller, Inc. 275 5th Street Bremerton, Washington 98337 RIC erg ARCHITECTURE ergUS & PLANNING (I� MILEa bL9ooTh REVIEWED FOR APPROVED APR " 6 2018 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 16 2018 PERMIT CENTER 6324 REGISTERED ECT GREGORY A. BELDING STATE OF WASHINGTON KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 ARCHITECT/INTERIORS: RICE FERGUS MILLER, INC. 275 FIFTH STREET, BREMERTON, WASHINGTON 98337 TEL: (360) 377-8773 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN 413 PINE STREET, SUITE300 SEATTLE, WA 98101 TEL (206)343-0460 MECHANICAL: ECOTOPE 4056 9 AVE. NE SEATTLE, WA 98105 TEL (206) 322-3753 ELECTRICAL: GERBER ENGINEERING 506 2'PAVE. #22 SEATTLE,WA 98104 :L: (206) 405-3510 March 15, 2018 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 NUMBER TITLE TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 002213 Supplementary Instructions DIVISION 01 - 011000 012600 TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Summary Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedure 013100 Project Management & Coordination 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 015000 Temporary Facilities & Controls 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017329 Cutting & Patching 017700 Closeout 017823 Operation & Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documentation DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Structure Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 033000 Cast -in -Place Concrete 033700 Concrete Sealant and Dustproofing DIVISION 04 - MASONRY No Requirements DIVISION 05 - METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 061000 061600 062000 064023 - WOODS, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Rough Carpentry Sheathing Finish Carpentry Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072500 Weather Barriers March 9, 2015 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 NUMBER 075100 076200 079200 DIVISION 08 081113 081416 084115 086250 087100 088000 TITLE Built -Up Asphalt Roofing Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Joint Sealants — OPENINGS Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Flush Wood Doors Aluminum Windows Tubular Daylighting Devices Door Hardware Glazing DIVISION 09 — 092400 092900 095123 096513 096516 098613 099113 099123 099300 DIVISION 10 — 101423.16 102220 104413 104416 FINISHES Portland Cement Plastering Gypsum Board Acoustical Tile Ceilings Resilient Base and Accessories Resilient Sheet Flooring Carpet Tile Exterior Painting Interior Painting Staining and Transparent Finishing SPECIALITIES Room -Identification Panel Signage Demountable Partitions Fire Extinguisher Cabinets Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT No Requirements DIVISION 12 — DIVISION 13 — FURNISHINGS No Requirements SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION No Requirements DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION By Design Build Contractor DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING No Requirements March 15, 2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 2 3 fl 3 3 a 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 NUMBER TITLE DIVISION 23 — 211313 SF 230000 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING Wet Pipe Sprinkler System HVAC General Conditions 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC 230553 HVAC Piping and Equipment Identification 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230700 HVAC Insulation 230800 Commissioning of HVAC 230993 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 232300 Refrigerant Piping 233100 HVAC Ducts and Casings 233300 HVAC Duct Accessories 233713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 234100 Particulate Air Filtration 237219 Fixed Plate Air to Air Energy Exchangers 238143 VRF Split -System Heat Pump DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260001 Basic Electrical Requirements DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS No Requirements DIVISION 28 — SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS No Requirements DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORKS No Requirements DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS No Requirements DIVISION 33- UTILTIES No Requirements TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 00 2213 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.1 PROJECT SCHEDULE AND SUBMITTALS A. BEFORE work begins on-site the Contractor will provide the Owner the following items: 1. Project Schedule a. Must be in Microsoft Project, Primavera or similar b. Must be cost loaded to reflect SOV items c. Provide a two (2) week look -ahead at weekly construction meeting. 2. Schedule of values a. Each item must correlate to the project schedule b. SOV to contain 15% for the closeout documents 3. Submittal schedule for entire project a. All submittals to KCHA prior to start of work. b. Any material submitted that is not listed in the project specifications will need to be submitted with a Substitution Request Form for review. 4. Site specific safety plan 5. Sub -contractor list with contact information B. Owner must approve the submitted items BEFORE prior to Contractor commencing work. 1.2 DAVIS BACON RESIDENTIAL RATES A. All Contractor employees and all sub -contractor employees will need to know their trade classification and pay rate. B. Owner will be conducting on-site wage interviews. C. Davis Bacon wages must be posted on-site at all times. 1.3 RESIDENTS A. THESE ARE OCCUPIED UNITS AND RESIDENTS' HOMES B. Refer any resident questions to the Property Manager or the Owner's Representative C. The building will remain occupied during construction. 1. The Contractor shall keep all common areas and walkways clear of debris at all times. 2. Emergency and tenant access must be maintained at all times. 3. Contractor will not enter any unit before 8:00 AM. 4. Contractor must coordinate unit entry with KCHA Construction Coordinator such that all required Notices -to -Tenants can be posted forty-eight (48) business hours PRIOR to unit entry. SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 002213 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 5. Contractor will complete ALL INTERIOR WORK within five (5) consecutive days. a. This includes all interior work, such as, trim work on new windows, doors, solid window sills, all drywall work, painting, blind installation, plumbing, electrical and punch list items. b. Contractor to incorporate start times, notice times and work limitations into their project schedule. 1.4 WORK HOURS A. Work hours are Monday — Friday 7:30 AM to 5:00 PM. B. There will be no weekend work. C. There will be no work on Owner holidays. Contractor to verify with Owner's Representative if there are any Owner holidays occurring during the duration of the Project. D. Owner does NOT pay overtime. 1.5 PARKING A. Parking is at a premium. Where the Contractor and sub -contractors may park, how many parking spaces may be used, lay down areas and staging area will be discussed in the pre - construction meeting and is outlined in Section 01 1000 Summary. B. All deliveries must be coordinated in advance and shall be limited to the scheduled delivery date(s) and time(s). 1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. A full time site Superintendent or Foreman will be on site at all times. 1. The Contractor's Superintendent or Foreman will be assigned a construction master key and will be held responsible should the key be lost or stolen. 2. If the master key is lost or stolen the Contractor will be responsible for re -keying all units to a new keying system by the end of the day the issue is reported. 3. The Contractor will solely responsible for all costs related to the re -keying. B. Exterior building lights must be operational at all times. C. Provide power and water for all site work unless otherwise indicated in the specifications. D. PRIVATE locate. E. All grading and staking for the duration of the Project. F. Dust control is required for all interior and exterior work. SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 002213 - 2 IRO veil KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 G. The Contractor shall employ sufficient number of workers and equipment to perform the Work in a diligent and expeditious manner. 1. All Contractor and sub -contractor employees shall perform all work in a professional manner 2. All tradesmen are to have a minimum of three (3) years of experience in their given trade. 3. Tradesmen must have the proper certification to perform work or to operate specific equipment that requires certifications and/or licenses. 4. The Contractor shall immediately remove from the site any of its employees or its sub -contractors' employees, as the Owner shall deem incompetent, careless, insubordinate or otherwise undesirable. H. All work is subject to Owner inspection and approval and is the responsibility of the contractor until it is turned over to KCHA. I. The Contractor is required to attend all inspections. J. All Work shall be performed using new materials, free of defects, installed in a professional, workmanlike manner to provide a "TurnKey" complete, safe and operable installation. K. The Contractor is responsible for all scheduling and coordination between all trades and any other sub -contractors working for the Contractor. L. The Contractor is expected to be on-site working each consecutive weekday unless directed otherwise by Owner. M. The Contractor is required to maintain the cleanliness of the work -site; there will be daily inspections by the Owner to verify cleanliness, safety and tenant access. N. The Contractor and its sub -contractors are to provide all labor, materials and equipment to provide a "Turn -Key" project 1. The Owner does not expect any change orders other than those created for unforeseen issues, Owner directed work and/or work that is outside the original 1.7 PERMITS A. The Owner will obtain the building permit. B. All other permits (including city of jurisdiction permits or agency of jurisdiction permits) are the Contractor's responsibility. 1.8 SAFETY A. Tenant safety and access is top priority B. Comply with all safety and health codes within Local, State or Federal jurisdictions. C. Operate within OSHA and State -equivalent standards and requirements. SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 002213 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Conduct weekly safety meetings; the minutes from these meeting are to be available to the Owner upon request. E. All workers on-site will wear high visibility vests or t -shirts to clearly identify the workers. F. All workers must be equipped with proper PPE and be wearing it at all times that they are on-site. 1.9 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. Owner will make any hazardous material reports available to the Contractor. B. If asbestos or is encountered, the Contractor will immediately notify the Owner and hire a certified abatement contractor. C. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, defend and hold the Owner harmless from any claims arising out of or relating to the presence of asbestos in the Owner's building that the Contractor has sub -contracted. D. If lead based paint is known to be present the Contractor is responsible for removal using the Lead -Safe protocol. 1.10 UTILITIES A. Contractor to coordinate all power/utility shut down with utility company and Owner. B. Contractor is responsible to hire a private locator prior to any work items that may affect the utilities. C. Contractor shall perform all required shutdowns and any other work that would disrupt normal operations with proper notification (minimum of forty-eight (48) hours) to the Owner and the tenants. D. Contractor to work directly with cable or phone company if any of their lines interfere with any Work. E. All penetrations will be sealed and/or fire caulked. 1.11 LANDSCAPING A. The Contractor will restore all landscaping to the original condition prior to turn over to Owner. 1.12 SITE DOCUMENTS A. The Construction and/or Permit plans will be on site at all times. B. The Contractor will keep and maintain, on-site, a separate but complete set of drawings. SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 002213 - 4 3 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. As -Built drawings will be current -to -date and will be reviewed on-site prior to each pay application. 1 Upon completion of the Project, the marked -up set of site documents shall be converted into as -built drawings and submitted to the Owner for review and approval. 1.13 CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS A. At the end of the project, the Contractor will submit final As -Built drawings to the Owner for approval. B. All completed permits and permit drawings to be submitted to Owner with final sign offs. C. Two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic copy of the Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manual for all major materials and equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor to the Owner upon Project completion and prior to request for final payment. 1. Electronic copy to be submitted for approval prior to submitting all copies. 2. O&M manuals will include all warranties associated with the Work. 3. All O&M manuals are subject to Owner approval. END OF SECTION 00 2213 SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 002213 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 011000 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Phased construction. 3. Work under other contracts. rr 4. Owner -furnished products. 5. Owner's occupancy requirements. 6. Applicable Codes. 7. Reference standards. 8. Use of premises and work restrictions. 9. Specification formats and conventions. 10. Execution, correlation and intent — Contract Documents. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: 1. Projecl. Name: King County Housing Authority — Office Interior Remodel 2. Project Location: 700 Andover Park West, Tukwila, WA 98188 B. Owner/Developer: King County Housing Authority 1. Owner's Representative: Heath Mac Coy 2. Contact Phone: 206-315-4395 C. Architects / Engineer: 1. Representative: _Greg Belding 2. Contact Phone: 360-377-8773 D. Reference Section A of the Bid Documents for scope of work. 1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION A. Construction shall be phased to accommodate Owner's desired schedule as noted in the bid documents and/or drawings, if applicable. Full master schedule shall include phasing schedule to be prepared by the Contractor, and reviewed and approved by the Owner. SUMMARY 011000 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Contractor shall prepare a phasing plan to maintain access to residential units during construction. Plan to be reviewed and approved by Owner prior to Work commencing. C. Before commencing Work of each phase of construction, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates, and move -out and -in dates of residents for all phases of the Work. 1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. 1.6 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products as indicated. This section includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner -furnished products. B. Owner -Furnished Products: 1. Products and materials as noted on drawings or otherwise indicated for re -use. 2. Products and materials as noted on drawings or otherwise indicated to be supplied by Owner. 1.7 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building before Substantial Completion. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. PRIOR to partial Owner Occupancy: 1. Owner will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied. 2. Contractor is responsible for obtaining a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. The mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational; all required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed for areas to be occupied. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving the occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for the occupied portions of building. 5. Coordinate insurance requirements with Owner prior to Owner occupancy of completed areas of the building. 1.8 CUTTING & PATCHING — Refer to Section 01 7329 — Cutting and Patching. 1.9 APPLICABLE CODES A. Perform all Work in accordance with the current code requirements of the city holding jurisdiction over the site where Work is to be completed. B. Certification of Code Compliance: All materials, methods and equipment shall comply with requirements of applicable codes and the Contract Documents, including requirements of all incorporated standards. The Contractor shall furnish, as a part of the 011000 - 2 3 SUMMARY KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 Contract, certification of such compliance if requested by the Architect or the Code Enforcing Agency. Such certification shall be submitted in the form of test results or other data from a recognized independent testing laboratory. Contractor shall coordinate and provide all required submittals to the Code Enforcing Agency in a timely manner so as to not delay progress of the Project. 1.10 USE OF PREMISES AND WORK RESTRICTIONS I A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations subject to phased construction requirements as specified in this Section and as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits. I 1. Security Procedures: Refer to Division 00 — General Conditions, for required security procedures to be followed while working at this building. 2. Contractor Identification: All Contractors on site shall be easily identifiable and must wear clothing, name badges, hardhats, safety vests, or other visible identification or identifying article (approved by Owner) with employee's, laborer or staff member's company logo or company name. 3 B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas as indicated on drawings. 1 C. Use of Parking Lot: D. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. E. On -Site Work Hours: Work in the existing occupied buildings will start no earlier than 8:OOam, and will be completed by 4:30pm. Hours for work performed outside of the building will be at the discretion of Owner's Representative. 1. Early Morning Hours: As approved by Owner's representative. 2. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Notify Owner and all affected utility companies seventy-two (72) hours in advance of proposed shutdown. 3. Contractor to notify residents of Work a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to start of Work. a. If Work progress or new work affects additional or a new set of residents, the Contractor must give a new notice of work to all affected residences a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to start of Work. 4. Hours for Core Drilling and other loud activities must comply with city of jurisdiction's noise codes. F. Nonsmoking Properties. All of King County Housing Authority properties are nonsmoking. G. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. H. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background Q screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. SUMMARY 011000 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative. 1.11 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 33 -division format and CSUCSC's "2010 Master Format" numbering system. 1. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular, where applicable, as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.12 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT — CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and specifications shall be considered complimentary or equal value Contact Owner immediately for clarification of conflicts, corrections and clarifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY 011000 - 4 3 7 • 3 3 i 3 3 I 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract Modifications. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Reference Article 7 in the General Conditions. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Change Order Requests (COR): Contractor will issue a detailed description of; 1. Proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 2. Change Order Requests (COR) and Construction Change Directives (CCD) shall be initiated by the Owner, dated and sequentially numbered on Owner provided forms. 3. CORs are not instructions either to stop Work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 4. After receipt of COR, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Provide a cost breakdown, including overhead and profit as a separate line item, and time extension request as provided for in Article 7 of The General Conditions. b. Provide all necessary product information, specifications, etc. required to justify any Contractor requested changes. 5. The allowed markup shall cover all indirect project costs, including but not limited to, the project Overhead, Profit and General Conditions a. The Contractor shall be allowed a maximum of fourteen (14%) percent Overhead, Profit, and General Conditions, on the cost of craft labor, equipment, small tools and materials for self -performed Change Order work. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 b. The Contractor shall be allowed a maximum of eight (8%) percent Overhead, Profit and General Conditions on the cost of craft labor, equipment, small tools and materials for Subcontractor Change Order work. The Contractor is not allowed to take profit on the profit of the Subcontractor as stated in form HUD -5370, section 29. c. A Subcontractor shall be allowed a maximum of fourteen (14%) percent of the cost of craft labor, equipment, materials and small tools for Overhead, Profit and General Conditions, for self -performed Change Order work. d. A Lower -Tier Subcontractor shall be allowed a maximum of fourteen (14%) percent of the cost of craft labor, equipment, materials and small tools for Overhead, Profit and General Conditions, for self -performed Change Order work. 6. Include a list of quantities of products required (or eliminated) their unit costs and a total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 7. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental and amounts of trade discounts. 8. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 9. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. a. Time extension requests must demonstrate the impact on the project Critical Path Schedule. See the General Conditions Article 15 and Section 01 3200 - Construction Progress Documentation. 10. Review all pricing provided by subcontractors and suppliers for accuracy and completeness. Verify that their scope of work is consistent with the requested change. Verify math is correct and that markup rates complies with the General Conditions. 11. After signing the Change Order Request or CCD, the Contractor shall return it to the Owner. 12. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Owner. 13. After review of the Contractor's price, cost breakdown and requested time extension, if any, the Owner will submit for estimation and do one of the following: a. Sign and route for approval. b. Reject and resubmit to the Contractor for pricing correction. c. Revise the Change Order Request or CCD and submit to the Contractor for repricing. 14. Prior to the Owner's acceptance of Change Order Requests, appropriate personnel shall also review the change requests. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Owner. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Provide a cost breakdown, including overhead and profit as a separate line item, and time extension request as provided for in Article 7 of the General Conditions. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 3 3 3 3 3 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Provide all necessary product information, specifications, etc. required to justify any Contractor requested changes. 4. Allowances for direct supervision, safety, small tools, overhead and profit are limited by the General Conditions, Article 7.1.1. 5. Include a list of quantities of products required (or eliminated), their unit costs and total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 6. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental and amounts of trade discounts. 7. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 8. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. a. Time extension requests must demonstrate the impact on the project Critical Path Schedule. See the General Conditions, and Section 01 3200 - Construction Progress Documentation. 9. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 10. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Owner. 11. After review of the Contractor's price, cost breakdown and requested time extension, if any, the Owner will submit for estimation and do one of the following: a. Sign and send on for approval. b. Reject and resubmit to the Contractor for pricing correction. c. Revise the Change Order Request or CCD and submit to the Contractor for repricing. 12. Prior to the Owner's acceptance of Change Order Requests, appropriate personnel shall also review the change requests. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE (CCD) A. Construction Change Directive: The Owner may issue a Field Authorization in accordance with provisions in Article 7, General Conditions. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of Work required by the CCD, with supporting documentation as required by CORs. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract, consistent with Article 7 of the General Conditions of the Contract. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. When approved and signed by the Owner, the Construction Change Directive will either be included in a Change Order Request (COR) to be charged against the Contract Allowance, or will be included in a formal Change Order, which will modify the Contract amount. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittal Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Owner at earliest possible date but no later than fourteen (14) days after the date of bid opening. 3. Sub -schedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub -schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Documents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Lines items are based on Scope of Work and sequencing. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Owner. c. Owner's contract number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Item #, including separate line for an Allowance (if applicable). b. Description of the Work. c. Total Dollar Value. d. Previous Application Amount. e. Dollar Amount Charged on Current Pay Application. f. Stored Materials. g. Total Complete and Stored. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total one hundred (100%) percent. h. Balance to Finish i. Retainage 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Documents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest one (1) cent; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off- site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing per Article 9.3.2 AIA A201-2007 General Conditions. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Owner and paid for by Owner. B. Payment Application Times: 1. The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Contract between Owner and Contractor. 2. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Contract. C. Payment Application Forms: PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 1 3 INN KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Use Payment Application forms as provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Owner will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 3. Provide current Subcontractor List with each Application for Payment. E. Transmittal: Submit one (1) signed and notarized original Application for Payment to Owner by a method ensuring receipt within forty-eight (48) hours. The Application for Payment shall include intent to pay prevailing wages and a running spreadsheet that itemizes both the intent and affidavit of wages paid to date for each subcontractor. 1. Transmit Application for Payment with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about the application. F. General Contractor Certification Upon Application For Payment: Refer to attached Exhibits in Contract. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede the first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. (Required at pre -construction conference.) 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (Master Schedule created in MS Project or equivalent format) (Required at pre -construction conference.) 4. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. (Required prior to contract award.) 5. Performance and payment bonds. (Required prior to contract award.) 6. Section 3 Work Plan, for projects whose contract value is five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) or higher. 7. Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages must be filed with L.I. 8. Contractor to provide Owner with initial Cash Flow Projections. Cash Flow Projection needs to reflect Work as detailed in Project Master Schedule. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Owner issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing one hundred (100%) percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 ra KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 r Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following (refer to Article 9.10 in AIA A201-2007 General Conditions: 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of Items specified. 3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled. 4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay. 5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner. 6. Proof that fees and similar obligations were paid. 7. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 8. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. 9. Operations and Maintenance Manuals 10. Record Drawings (i.e. As -built drawings, redline drawings) 11. Final Affidavits of Wages Paid filed with L&I. 1.6 SPECIAL PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS (Not Used) PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) 3 END OF SECTION 012900 0.1 3 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Information (RFIs). B. See Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field -engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Document. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Contractor's Responsibility to coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre -installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Contractor is responsible for scheduling and conducting meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants, others who are involved and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned; send the electronic version of the meeting minutes to the Project Manager and the Project Engineer, within three (3) days of the meeting. B. Pre -construction Conference: A pre -construction conference shall be scheduled before starting construction. Owner to hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. 2. Agenda: Owner to discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Scope of Work. b. Contract Start and End Dates. c. Authority of Owner's Personnel. d. Davis Bacon/Prevailing Wage Certified Payroll Reports/Labor Relations and Section 3. e. Insurance Certificate, Endorsement and Performance and Payment Bonds. f. General Requirements/Special Conditions. g. Schedules, including Phasing. h. Easements, Permits, Lines & Grades. i. Contractors Superintendent. j. Subcontractor List and Safety Plan. k. Tests, Samples and Observations. 1. Progress Meetings and Reports. m. Applications and Certificates of Payment, and Retention. n. Progress Payments. o. Change Orders. P. Warranty Requirements. q. Submittals. r. Temporary and Storage Facilities, Staging Areas and Jobsite Security. s. Clean-up and Trash Removal. t. Salvage of Materials and Spare Materials. u. Record Drawings. v. Substantial Completion, Final Payment and Retainage. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 AI • KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 w. Recycling and Energy Conservation. x. Minutes: The Owner will record and distribute Pre -construction meeting minutes via email. C. Progress Meetings: The Contractor will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. (refer to Article 3.1.4 of General Conditions). 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and the Contractor, each subcontractor, supplier and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Contractor shall provide a short term look -ahead schedule for presentation and review at each progress meeting. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 21) Safety 22) Section 3 compliance and status 3. Minutes: Contractor will record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Contractor will email the minutes to all concerned prior to the meeting and will distribute written copies of the minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Two (2) -Week Look Ahead Schedule after each progress meeting. This schedule will be discussed in each progress meeting. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. b. Contractor's weekly reports will consist of five (5) daily reports, each reflecting the preceding five (5) days. These reports will be sent electronically to the Owner on a schedule that will be determined at the Pre - Construction Meeting or at each progress meeting. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs generated from subcontractor or supplier of the Contractor must be routed through the General Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. 3. If a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of the RFI, it is required the suggestion be supplied with the submitted RFI. If no suggestion is given where one is possible, the RFI will be returned as incomplete. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name and number. 2. RFI Subject. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 10. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 11. Contractor's signature. 12. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, product data, shop drawings and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. C. Hard -Copy RFIs: Form established by Contractor's Project Management system. 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Owner's Action: Owner will review each RFI, determine action required and return it. Allow five (5) working days for Owner's acknowledgement of each RFI. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Owner's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Owner's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Owner's time for response will start again. 3. Owner's action may include architect and/or engineer recommendation or approval of proposed solution. 4. Owner's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Order Request according to General Conditions. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Owner in writing within five (5) days of receipt of the RFI response. E. On receipt of Owner's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Owner within three (3) days if Contractor disagrees with response. F. Contractor RFI Log: Prepare, maintain and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive and Change Order Request, as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule (refer to Article 8.8 in Contract AIA A105 and Article 3.10.2 in General Conditions AIA A201). 3. Daily construction reports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical Path Method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. E. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building or a similar significant construction element. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit one (1) electronic copy of schedule to the Owner. Arrange the following information in a tabular format 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor (if applicable). 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit one (1) electronic copy and one (1) hard copy of initial schedule to the Owner. The hard copy should be large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals to the Owner, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL (refer to Article 8.2 in the contract AIA A105 and Article 3.10.1 in the General Conditions AIA A201) A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion as set by the date of Notice to Proceed. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items as separate activities in schedule. a. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than ten (10) days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion and Final Completion. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit to the Owner a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -chart -type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within fourteen (14) days of date after Letter of Award. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. The Gantt -Chart Schedule can be either in Projects or a PDF format. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three (3) months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in ten (10%) percent increments within time bar. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At two (2) week intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule three (3) days before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute electronic copies of approved schedule to Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and other submittals. B. Related Sections: 1. See Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. 2. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 3. See Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Owner's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Owner's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1. Submit electronic submittals to Owner via email as PDF electronic files. a. Owner will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one (1) copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 a. Owner reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows: 1. Time for review shall commence on Owner's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 2. Initial Review: Allow five (5) working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Owner will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 3. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 4. Resubmittal Review: Allow seven (7) working days for review of each resubmittal. D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. •+ 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Owner. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect (if applicable). d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use consecutively numbered submittals (001, 002, etc), followed by the Specification Section number, followed by a sequential number indicating version (e.g., 001-13 3300-0). 2) Example: 001 — 01 1300 — 0 a) 001: Consecutively numbered submittals b) 01 1300: Specification Section c) 0: Version of submittal (0 = original submittal; 1 = first resubmittal; 2 = 2nd resubmittal; etc.) i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. 1. Substitution Requests SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 1 1 .i KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Owner observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Owner will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Make Corrections Noted" or "No Exceptions Taken". Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Make Corrections Noted" or "No Exceptions Taken". 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1. Release of CADD information will be restricted to the following categories: a. Architectural floor plans. b. Site plan. c. Reflected ceiling plans. d. Exterior elevations. e. Stair sections. 2. The CADD database will contain only the background information; the sheet numbers, sheet titles, room names and numbers, reference symbols, and other similar data will not be included. 3. The CADD database will be generated on PC hardware with Autodesk AutoCAD software. Architect has the capability to develop CADD output to meet capabilities of all major platforms and major media types. 4. When requesting CADD databases, specify the output form required. PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. General: Prepare and submit to Owner, Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS- 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Owner. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 1. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. P. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. C. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency. 4. Number of Copies: Submit to Owner, four (4) copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Owner will return two (2) copies. Mark up and retain one (1) returned copy as a Project Record Document. D. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shop -work manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 1. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size drawings, submit to Owner, Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit to Owner, a minimum of three (3) opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Submit additional copies as required for each consultant. Owner will return two (2) copies. At the sole discretion of the Owner electronic copies may be acceptable. E. Samples: Submit to Owner, Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one (1) full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Owner will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Owner will retain two (2) Sample sets; remainder will be returned. F. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. 1. Number of Copies: Submit a minimum of three (3) copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Submit additional copies for each consultant required to review the submittal. Owner will return two (2) copies. G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in the General Conditions of the Contract and Owner -Contractor Contract. H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in the Owner -Contractor Contract. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in the Owner -Contractor Contract. If needed, combine subcontract list in paragraph below with product list above. Subcontract list is required by General Conditions to be submitted as soon as practical after award of the Contract. J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Number of Copies: Submit electronically to Owner, one (1) copy of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit to Owner, two (2) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Owner will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in the General Conditions of the Contract, and Owner -Contractor Contract. D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and Owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. L Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. M. Pre -construction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address and telephone number of manufacturer. S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory - authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal. 3.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Owner. B. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, electronically submit three (3) copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 2. If submittal has a wet stamp, then send three (3) hard copies, with the wet stamp to Owner for approval. Owner will return one (1) copy to Contractor. PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. 4.2 OWNER'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Owner will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Owner will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. B. Informational Submittals: Owner will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Owner will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. iii SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality assurance and quality -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements, if applicable. Not all Divisions will be used. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Owner. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Pre -construction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. F. Source Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory or shop. G. Field Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. J. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of two (2) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two (2) or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Owner for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Owner for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 TESTING SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies, as prescribed by Contract, but not provided by Owner shall demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Reports: Prepare and electronically submit to the Owner certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on re -testing and re -inspecting. C. Permits, Licenses and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly or product that is similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this Project. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Owner. 2. Notify Owner seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Owner's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. J. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of pre -construction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 33. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and re -inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality -control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Notify testing agencies at least twenty-four 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, electronically submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality - control service to the Owner. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Re-testing/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including re -testing and re - inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Owner and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which on- site tests will be conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Electronically submit to the Owner a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality - assurance and quality -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples and similar activities. 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality -control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Owner and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality - control service to Owner with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Electronically submitting to the Owner a final report of special tests and inspections, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies, at Substantial Completion. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Re -testing and re -inspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 3 3 WI 1 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. See Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. C. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. Not all Sections will be used 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use with approval of Owner's Representative. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. Contractor must notify Owner forty-eight (48) hours before use of water service. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Contractor is responsible for supplying power service and distribution as required for construction operations, unless other arrangements are made with approval of Owner's Representative. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Existing Permanent Facilities: Contractor shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance and protection of each existing permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and existing facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and existing facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services as required by progress of the Work. 3. Provide temporary keys and lock cores throughout duration of Contractor's occupancy of Owner's space. Contractor to provide Owner's Representative with temporary construction keys matching construction cores installed for access. a. When Contractor is given keys to KCHA property, Contractor will claim responsibility for the keys by signing for keys acquired. If contractor loses keys, Contractor is responsible for rekeying all locks associated with lost key. Contractor is responsible for returning keys back to Owner's Representative when Work is completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. C. Contractor is responsible for security of Temporary Facilities. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 13 at each return air grille in system and remove and replace at end of construction. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 3 3 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated re -circulation, or combustion type; vented; fully -enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. D. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap -dispenser, bottled -water, drinking -water units, including paper cup supply. 1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 degrees F. E. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA -polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110 -to -120-V plugs into higher -voltage outlets; equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light. F. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted, and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V AC, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. With Owner's approval, locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. Provide Owner with seventy-two (72) hour notice if disturbance is to occur to site staff or residents. B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water for use by construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted with Owner's approval, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained daily. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 degrees F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. 2. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes and odors from entering occupied areas. E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner after receiving approval by Owner's Representative. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. Contractor shall not use Owner's waste receptacles for any disposal. B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel upon Owner's approval. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with Owner's instructions for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. E. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by Owner. F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. G. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor -to -ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by tenants from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with two (2) layers of 6 -mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Overlap and tape full length of joints. 2. Where fire -resistance -rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 3. Seal joints and perimeter. 4. Protect air -handling equipment. 5. Provide walk -off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. 6. Dust Control/Air handlers H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking on Owner's property. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation and similar facilities on a twenty-four (24) hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. C. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. Not all Sections will be used. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled -content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance and other PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Electronically submit three (3) copies of each request for consideration to the Owner. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be ••� replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the 3 following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. 3 b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, which will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.3 c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. 3 f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and the names and addresses of Architects and Owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to3 authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including 3 effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. 3 J. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with3 requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may3 subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 2. Owner's Action: If necessary, the Owner will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven (7) days of receipt of a request for substitution. Owner will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within ten (10) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Signed and Approved Substitution Request Form. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two (2) or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation and weather -protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Pre-printed written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Electronically submit a draft for approval before final execution to the Owner. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. Not all Sections will be used. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Owner's. 6. Descriptive, performance and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one (1) of the products listed or equal product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one (1) of the manufacturers listed or equal manufacturer that complies with requirements. 3. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one (1) of the products listed, or a equal product. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed "or Equal" product. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 4. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one (1) of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer. 5. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 6. Basis -of -Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one (1) of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns and textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Owner will select color, pattern, density or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Owner will select color, pattern, density or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing. Owner will consider requests for substitutions if received within sixty (60) days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Owner. . B. Conditions: Owner will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Owner will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 6 3 3 3 7 nit 12 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 017300 EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY B. A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Progress cleaning. 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction. 6. Correction of the Work. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner -accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Not Applicable PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. Notify Owner of any discrepancies between plans and actual conditions on site. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer or Applicator and Owner present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. EXECUTION 017300 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and approved by Owner. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Owner, per Section 01 3100. 1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate between the various Contract Documents, including the Drawings and Specifications, with neither superseding the other. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, it is the Contractor's responsibility to seek clarification. 2. Where conflicts and/or omissions have not been brought to the attention of the Owner, it is understood that the Contractor has made provisions in the bid for the most costly material or methods. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Owner promptly. B. General: Engage experienced layout engineers to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 2. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 3. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 4. Notify Owner when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. EXECUTION 017300 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Install materials in lengths that produce the minimum amount of joints. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise and dust levels. Refer to Dust Control in Exhibit A of Contract. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Attachments: Provide blocking and attachment plates, anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Owner. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, submit proposed joint layout, for Owner's approval. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. 1. Use weather cuts, miters, back caulk as needed. Use lengths that minimize joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. EXECUTION 017300 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. If required, Contractor must submit MSDS for all products to be used onsite to Owner for approval. Owner shall have seven (7) days to review and approve/disapprove of the product. 2. If required, Contractor must submit a weekly schedule detailing when and where approved products will be used on an hour -by -hour basis. This schedule must be submitted by 9:00 AM on Wednesday of the week prior to the scheduled work week. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully in compliance with Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2, Do not hold materials more than seven (7) days during normal weather or three (3) days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 4. Do not use Owner receptacles. 5. Recycle as outlined in Waste Management Plan in Section 01 7419. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. EXECUTION 017300 - 4 7 7 3 2 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units and re -test. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory -authorized service representative is required to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction as well as landscapes and hardscapes to their original condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION 017300 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. Not all Sections will be used. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, patching, extending or matching shall be performed as necessary to make the Work complete, with all components matching and consistent. 2. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Owner's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 3. Patching materials shall meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. 4. All patching procedures shall be reviewed with the Owner prior to proceeding. 1.4 WARRANTY CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329- 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Cut, move or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace and restore at completion. E. Contact the Owner when unsuitable materials not marked for removal - such as rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated concrete and masonry are discovered. F. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. G. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes. 3.3 PERFORMANCE 3 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329- 2 •i 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Provide appropriate dust control while cutting through surfaces. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 and 33 Sections (Sections may not be used) where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finishes; refinish trimmed areas. E. Where existing items are indicated as cut or reconfigured, cap and finish all exposed edges to match the existing construction to remain. Provide new or relocated supports spaced to be consistent with the installation. F. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty and similar materials. CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329- 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 END OF SECTION 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3 017329- 4 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. See the Owner -Contractor Contract for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. C. See Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications and Record Product Data. D. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. E. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. Not all Sections will be used. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (Refer to Article 9.8 AIA A201-2007) A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications and similar documents (to be included in O&M Manuals). 4. Obtain and submit to Owner, the releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys and similar final record information to the Owner. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records to the Owner. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 15. Provide training on all newly installed systems by qualified personnel. Training will be presented to those that use the equipment, i.e. tenants site staff, facility users. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion to the Owner. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Owner, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 CONTRACT COMPLETION (Refer to Article 9.10 in AIA A201-2007) A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Contract Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to the Owner -Contractor Contract provisions to the Owner. 2. Submit to the Owner, a certified copy of Owner's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Owner. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements to the Owner. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance to the Owner. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Preparation: After Contractor has performed own Quality Control of the Work, Contractor will notify and schedule punch list inspection with Owner and other team members. Owner will document items needing correction on Owner provided form listing area inspected and deficient item needing correction. Owner will provide Contractor with copy of punch list after inspection is completed. Owner has right to stop inspection due to quantity of repetitious items identified by Owner, or if Contractor has not performed own Quality Control of the Work 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment and building systems. 1.6 WARRANTIES (Refer to Article 3.5in AIA A201-2007) A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Owner for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and anti- pollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains and other foreign deposits. c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material from Project site. d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. e. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. f. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. g. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision - obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. h. Remove labels that are not permanent. i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings and other foreign substances. k. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 1. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers and grills. n. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective or noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes, systems, and equipment. B. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. Every Division may not be used. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manual: Submit one (1) electronic copy of each manual in final form at least fifteen (15) days before final inspection. Owner will return copy with comments within fifteen (15) days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Owner's comments. Submit two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic copy on Compact Disk of each corrected manual within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Owner's comments. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALS- GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents and manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment and components of one (1) system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple -volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross- referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents and drawing locations. 2.2 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in and control procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal and weekend operating instructions; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2 7 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed and identify color -coding where required for identification. 2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual; identify by product name and arrange to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Re -ordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual; identify by product name and arrange to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of equipment: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide, disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions that detail essential maintenance procedures. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material and finish incorporated into the Work. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem and piece of equipment not part of a system. C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data includes more than one (1) item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. E. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4 sal KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. C. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. Every Division may not be used. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Submit to Owner PDF and CAD files of scanned record prints and three (3)sets of prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications to the Owner. C. Record Product Data: Submit to the Owner, annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked -up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous recordkeeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. E. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Record Prints: Maintain one (1) set of black -line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Field Authorization numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2 .r 1 E KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one (1) copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Owner's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner -occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins. D. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 3 1 3 S 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire -protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain. Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruption specified in Section 011000 "Summary". 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 3 3 ..„ 7 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least <Insert number> hours after flame -cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power -driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power -driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power -driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Section 075113 for new roofing requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA -approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. and recycle or dispose of them according to Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished material off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 1 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2,1. Interior slabs -on -grade. B. Related Sections: A CantinentftiIMAIk knysise w k? 11. See General Structural Notes in structural drawings for additional information and requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast - furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 "Submittal Procedures". B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 March 15, 2018 required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 1=E_Samples: For vapor retarder. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI -certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI -certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Owner will engage an independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI -certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI -certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials" 3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete". 4. ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete." 5. ACI 311, "Guide for Concrete Inspection". CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 F. Concrete Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Communications, Correspondence, Coordination and Meetings". 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot -weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint -filler strips, vapor -retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth Formed Finished Concrete: Form facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior grade plywoed panels, suitable fof-concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill release agent treated and edge scaled. c. Structural 1, B B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Rough Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/1 by 3/1 inch, minimum. 1 March 15, 2018 E. Form Release Agent: Commercially formulated form release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrctc surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of eenefete-suffaees, 1. Formulate form release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form facing materials. F. Form Ties: Factory fabricated, removable or snap off metal or glass fiber reinforced plastic eefterete-en-remeval, 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrctc surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing waterproofing. 242.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. As indicated in the drawings. 242.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2,42.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, C595 Type II gray. Supplement with the following: a. Fly ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Coarse -Aggregate Size: As indicated by the Table 3 for Type or Location of concrete for Moderate Weathering Region. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Retain subparagraph below if optional restriction for fine aggregate in ASTM C 33 is required. 3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.52.4 ADMIXTURES A. Set -Accelerating Corrosion -Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. Containing no more than .05 percent chloride ions. 262.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape. 1. Products: a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra 15. b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. c. Stego Industries, LLC.; Stego Wrap, 15 mils. B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. 242.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 242.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two -component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. See structural notes. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022 -inch- thick, galvanized -steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2:92.8 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.102.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACT 301, to support vertical, can support such loads. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 317 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth formed finished surfaces. 2. Cla F B, 1/1 inch for rough formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust stained steel form facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike off templates or compacting type screeds. is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to locations. H. Do not chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing uch items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other dcbris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form release agent, according to manufacturer's written 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Scc structural notcs for additional requirements. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS March 15, 2018 A. General: Formwork for parts of the Work that docs not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28 day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or new form release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete 443.1 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Under slab on grade Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 343.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 343.3 JOINTS CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. C. Contraction C-entrol Joints in Slabs on Grade: €ten weakened plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 inch wide joints into concrete when develops random contraction cracks. 34.3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. E. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1; with structural notes, and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. F. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301; with structural notes, and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.83.5 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. -43.6 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin -film - finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10 -foot -long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch. 3-l- 3.7 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.113.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot - weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Horizontal Slabs: Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.123.9 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.133.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 -inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.143.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts and studs. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 7. As required in structural inspection schedule in drawings. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory - cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing. END OF SECTION 03 3000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 03 3700 - CONCRETE SEALANT AND DUSTPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealing and dustproofing of horizontal concrete surfaces. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 302 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. C. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and installation details under provisions of Division 1. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of Division 1. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sealer and Dustproofer #2: All new, interior slab locations. 1. Sealer Product Description: Sealer/dustproofer. 2. Products: Dayton/Superior Day -Chem Sure -Hard (J-17), or approved equal. 3. Color: Clear 2.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Division 1. CONCRETE SEALANT AND DUSTPROOFING 03 3700 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be sealed. 2.03 EXECUTION - GENERAL A. Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. B. Concrete sealer and dustproofer: Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect adjacent materials and finishes from overspray. Clean as required. 2.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division 1. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. END OF SECTION CONCRETE SEALANT AND DUSTPROOFING 03 3700 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural -steel frame and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 2. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface - preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical, high-strength bolted connections. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. 1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom -flange, demand -critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. Channels, Angles -Shapes: Per Structural Notes. B. Plate and Bar: Per Structural Notes. C. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: Per Structural Notes. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 85) heavy -hex carbon - steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible -washer type with plain finish. B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold -finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. Camber structural -steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop - priming operations. B. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. C. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. D. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip -critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials (applied fireproofing). B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.7 GALVANIZING A. Hot -Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot -dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4 Nei KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast -in- place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit boks. G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field -welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less -than -continuous 360 -degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power -tool cleaning. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." END OF SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 2. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions. 3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip -aggregate surface finishes. 2. Paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/DI.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.3 NONFERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Stainless -Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A 1). E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Hot -dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. G. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy [Group 1 (Al)] [Group 2 (A4)] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). H. Slotted -Channel Inserts: Cold -formed, hot -dip galvanized -steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee -head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6 -inch (150 - mm) embedment and 2 -inch (50 -mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Finish all exposed steel per Division 09 Painting. 2.8 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches (50 mm) larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls. D. Furnish wedge -type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast -in- place concrete. 2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. 2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.13 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. As -Fabricated Finish: AA -M12. B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil (0.05 -mm) dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. See General Structural Notes in Structural Drawings for additional information and requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 -inches nominal (38 mm actual) size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire -retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire - retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness or less; 19 percent for more than 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish,. D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade. 2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than [1/2 -inch (13 -mm)] [3/4 -inch (19 -mm)] nominal thickness. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC -ES AC70. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate to withstand same loads as framing anchors. B. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z 180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). B. Adhesives for Gluing to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. C. Water -Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate [furring, ]nailers, blocking, [grounds, ]and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. D. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturers written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. E. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. H. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood -framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet (6 m) o.c. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. J. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. K. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. L. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two - Family Dwellings. 3. ICC -ES evaluation report for fastener. M. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure -preservative -treated, key -beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1 -by -2 -inch nominal- (19 -by -38 -mm actual-) size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non -load-bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2 -by -6 -inch nominal- (38 -by -140 -mm actual-) 2 -by -4 -inch nominal- (38 -by -89 -mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2 -by -6 -inch nominal- (38 -by -140 -mm actual-) 2 -by -4 -inch nominal- (38 -by -89 -mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches (2438 mm) high, using members of 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non -load-bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs and headers not less than 4 - inch nominal (89 -mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in width, 6 -inch nominal (140 -mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8 -inch nominal (184 -mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10 -inch nominal (235 -mm actual) depth for openings 10 to 12 feet (3 to 3.6 m) in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double jamb studs for openings 60 inches (1500 mm) and less in width, and triple -jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet enough that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project Na. 2017036 SECTION 06 1600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water -resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 2. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire - retardant -treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. SHEATHING 06 1600 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. B. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.3 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 2. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic -polymer or other corrosion -protective coating having a salt -spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. D. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic -polymer or other corrosion -protective coating having a salt -spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954. SHEATHING 06 1600 - 2 Il KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.5 SHEATHING JOINT -AND -PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium -modulus, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Use common wire nils unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. D. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Screw to cold -formed metal framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA -253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. SHEATHING 06 1600 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold -formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8 -inch gap where non -load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4 -inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V -grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self -furring metal lath is screw -attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self -furring metal lath is screw -attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. END OF SECTION 06 1600 SHEATHING 06 1600 - 4 n s KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 062000- FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1. Interior carpentry items, other than custom casework. 2. Plastic Laminate Wainscots 3. Hardware and attachment B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board". 2. Division 09 Section "Stained and Transparent Finishing". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans and elevations showing extent of materials. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 WARRANTY FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace materials that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: per manufactures standard warranty. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Interior Hardwood Lumber: White Maple, match profiles shown, and finish to match wood stained doors unless noted otherwise. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Interior Plywood: 5/8" White Maple faced plywood, plain sawn, finish to match wood stained doors unless noted otherwise. B. Plastic Laminate: 4 x 8 sheets 2.3 FASTENERS A. Non -corrosive or galvanized at all exterior locations and interior wet locations, including Apparatus Bay and all rooms with plumbing fixtures. Cadmium plated dry interior locations. Make fasteners of adequate size, spacing and number to resist design loads under intended use and of types appropriate for materials or conditions for which used. Comply with the following standards: 1. Nails: FF -N-105; common wire for concealed work; finish or casing for exposed work. 2. Screws: Brass for attachment of wood, where exposed; steel elsewhere, except matching metal when used to attach metal items. Use case-hardened steel for self -drilling, self - tapping screws. 3. Bolts, Nuts: FF -B-575, case hardened steel for self -tapping bolts. 4. Lag Bolts and Screws: FF -B-561. 5. Expansion Shields: FF -S-325; metal with no plastic or fiber parts. 6. Toggle Bolts: FF -B-0588; galvanized. 2.4 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate Wainscot: NEMA LD3; General purpose high pressure laminate .050 thickness. Color as scheduled. B. Adhesives: 1. For woodwork: Phenol -resin or resorcinol -resin. 2. For Plastic Laminate: Contact Cement; Federal Specification MMM -A -130B. FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Hardware: Furnish metal edge and seam trim for plastic laminate wainscot, size and type to suit application. 1. Division Bar Seam Trim: Extruded aluminum silver, 5/32". Nudo Products, Inc. NCP - X, #DB or equal. 2. End Cap Trim: Extruded aluminum silver, 5/32". Nudo Products Inc. NCP -X, #EC or equal. 3. Inside Corner Trim: Extruded aluminum silver, 5/32". Nudo Products Inc. NCP -X, #IC or equal. 4. Outside Corner Trim: Extruded aluminum silver, 5/32". Nudo Products Inc. NCP -X, #OC or equal. D. Provide similar trim as above for plywood wainscot. E. Wood Filler: Tinted to match surface finish color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work, C. Do not install finish interior woodwork until the building has been dry for at least 10 days. D. Verify spaces and preparation of surfaces are ready to receive finish carpentry items. E. Broom clean spaces before beginning installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate with work under other sections to obtain a neat, workmanlike, finished result. B. Installation of Finish Carpentry Items: 1. Finished Work: Erect plumb, level, true, square and in accordance with drawings. Do not install interior work until building is thoroughly dry. Leave work in suitable condition to receive finishes noted elsewhere in there specifications. 2. Woodwork assembled on job: Accurately cut, fit and neatly install. Install trim in lengths as long as practicable with running joints mitered and tightly fit. Locate joints only where solid fastenings can be made. 3. Scribing, Mitering and Joining: Done accurately and neatly to conform to details. Cope intersecting moulds at interior corners neatly, rather than miter, where possible. FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 4. Fasten by securely attaching work to metal studs or backing strips, blocking or other supports where noted or appropriate fasteners. Remove wood raised in by driven nails and screws. 3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners below surface of wood. Apply tinted wood filler to match wood work in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09900. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset form true Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. 3.5 PLASTIC LAMINATE WAINSCOT COLOR SCHEDULE A. Restrooms, See drawings for additional locations B. Plastic Laminate Wainscot: 1. Location: per drawings 2. Sheet Size: 4' x 8' 3. Manufacturer: Formica 4. Color: 5342 -SP Earth Sculpted Finish END OF SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 06 4023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Plastic -laminate cabinets. 3. Plastic -laminate countertops. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 3. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories. B. Product Data: For panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, cabinet hardware and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and other items installed in architectural woodwork. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent - finished woodwork. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence -matched wood veneers and transparent -finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Certified Wood: Interior architectural woodwork shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD -01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." C. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Maple. D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Recycled Content of Medium -Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content. 2. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 3. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 5. Particleboard: Straw -based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density. 6. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 7. Veneer -Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP -1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. E. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium -density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine -impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT -1. 1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges. F. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)„” B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening. C. Back -Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141, Push -in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131. E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112. F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted; full -extension type; zinc - plated steel with polymer rollers. 2. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full -extension type; zinc -plated steel ball-bearing slides. 3. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. 4. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide. 5. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches wide. H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1 -1/4 -inch OD, color to match finish of countertop, molded -plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. Provide 3 per counter top surface and supply 50 extra to be field located. K. Circular counter top waste chute: 9" Stainless Steel Rolled Flange, Exposed Surfaces to have a satin finish. L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in-place anchors. C. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 4 Nip KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Per manufacturer meeting LEED requirements. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated, for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. D. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.5 PLASTIC -LAMINATE CABINETS A. Grade: Premium. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Edges: Grade HGS. E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS a. Edges of Plastic -Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding,0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic -laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. F. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Finish as indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2. HPL -1 Formica 5342 -SP Earth Sculpted Finish 3. HPL -2 Wilsonart 4869-60 Western White 4. HPL -3 Wilsonart 4886-38 Pearl Soapstone 5. HPL -4 Formica 9012 -NT -Ebony 6. HPL -5 Formica 5884-58 Chestnut Woodlane 7. HPL -6 Wilsonart 4876-38 Sheer Mesh H. Provide dust panels of 1/4 -inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. 2.6 PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Premium. B. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations 2. HPL -1 Formica 5342 -SP Earth Sculpted Finish 3. HPL -2 Wilsonart 4869-60 Western White 4. HPL -3 Wilsonart 4886-38 Pearl Soapstone 5. HPL -4 Formica 9012 -NT -Ebony 6. HPL -5 Formica 5884-58Chestnut Woodlane 7. HPL -6 Wilsonart 4876-38 Sheer Mesh D. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Particleboard or medium -density fiberboard. G. Core Material at Sinks: exterior -grade plywood. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic -laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. I. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 1. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head screws sized for 1 -inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer -head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06 4023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 8 7 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 07 2500 - WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building paper. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For building wrap, include data on air and water -vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Building Paper: Water -vapor -permeable, asphalt -saturated kraft building paper. 1. Water vapor transmission not less than 35 g/sq. m x 24 hr per ASTM D 779. 2. Water resistance not less than 1 hour per ASTM F 1249. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667., PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER .INSTALLATION A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water -resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed. B. Cover sheathing with water -resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion - or control joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4 -inch overlap unless otherwise indicated. C. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2 -inch overlap and a 6 -inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. WEATHER BARRIERS 07 2500 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 END OF SECTION 07 2500 WEATHER BARRIERS 07 2500 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 07 5113 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divison 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Built-up asphalt roofing system. 2. Cover board. 3. Roof insulation. 4. Vapor retarder. 5. Substrate board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, cants, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck. 3. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 "Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing"; glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual"; and the Roof Consultants Institute "Glossary of Roofing Terms" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. B. Sheet Metal Terminology and Techniques: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. C. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mop -applied roofing asphalt and 75 centipoise for mechanical spreader -applied roofing asphalt, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F, measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. 4. Insulation fastening patterns. 5. Patching of existing roofing system. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system. F. indicate that bulk roofing asphalt materials delivered to Project comply with requirements. Include quantity and statistical and descriptive data for each product. Submit certificate with each load before it is used. G. Include continuous log showing time and temperature for each load of bulk asphalt, indicating date obtained from manufacturer, where held, and how transported before final heating and application on roof. H. Maintenance Data: Refer to Johns Manville's latest published bituminous binder. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 2 115 3 J 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has FMG approval for roofing system identical to that used for this Project. C. Moisture Survey: 1. Submit prior to installation, results of a non-destructive moisture test of roof system completed by approved third party. Utilizing one of the approved methods: a. Infrared Thermography b. Nuclear Backscatter D. Source Limitations: Obtain all components from single source roofing manufacturer. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 10. Require all trades listed in Preliminary Roofing Conference to be present. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from detenloration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 GUARANTEE A. Provide manufacturer's system guarantee equal to Johns Manville's Peak Advantage No Dollar Limit Roofing System Guarantee. 1. Single -Source special warranty includes roofing plies, base flashings, liquid applied flashing, roofing membrane accessories, granule surfaced roofing membrane, roof insulation, fasteners, cover board, substrate board, vapor retarder, walkway products, , and other single -source components of roofing system marketed by the manufacturer. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer's Guarantee: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: C. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design: Johns Manville Roofing Systems 2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES A. Glass -Fiber Base -Ply Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt -impregnated, glass -fiber felt. Product: GlasPly IV BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.3 roofing membrane capSheet A. Cap Sheet: ASTM D 3909, asphalt -impregnated and -coated, glass -fiber cap sheet, with white, refelective, coarse mineral-granulle top surfacing and fine mineral surfacing on bottom surface. Product: GlasKap CR 2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt -impregnated, glass -fiber felt. Product: GIasPIy IV B. Select backer sheet, required for two-ply modified flashings behind exposed flashing sheet. Contact Johns Manville Technical for flashing detail assistance. C. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, glass -fiber -reinforced, SBS -modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. Product: DynaBase D. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I, glass -fiber -reinforced, SBS -modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified. Product: DynaWeld Cap FR CR E. Flashing Sheet: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt -impregnated and -coated composite sheet; smooth surfaced and reinforced with a composite polyester and glass -fiber core. Product: GlasTite Flexible 2.5 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type IV. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. 2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofing. B. Mastic Sealant: As required by Jdhns Manville. C. Fasteners: Factory -coated steell fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion - resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and provided by the roofing system manufacturer. Product: UltraFast Fasteners and Plates BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.7 Cover board A. Perlite Board: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders and waterproofing agents with top surface seal -coated. Product: : 1/2" Retro -Fit Board 2.8 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Product: ENRGY 3 1. Provide insulation package with minimum thickness 1.5 inches. 2. Install no boards thicker than 1.5". If insulation package required is thicker than 1.5", install in multiple layers. 2.9 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion - resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and provided by roofing system manufacturer. Product: UltraFast Fasteners and Plates. C. Cold Fluid -Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's No VOC, two -component cold fluid -applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. D. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. E. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" F. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion - resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. Product: [UltraFast Fasteners and Plates] [All Purpose Fasteners and Plates] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements un Division 05 Section "Steel Decking." B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSULATION and Cover Board INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roof system components so insulation and cover board is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation and cover board. C. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45 -degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees per manufacturer's instruction. D. Install boards with long joints in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with like material. 1. Cut and fit boards within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall thickness is 1.5 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. F. Trim surface of boards where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. G. Install tapered edge strips .at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation and Cover Board: Secure uppermost layer to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type to deck type. Loose lay all other layers below with staggered joints. 1. Fasten according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof., BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 Mechanically Fastened with Subsequent Layers Adhered Insulation and Cover Board: Secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type to deck type. 1. Fasten first layer according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten first layer to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3. Install subsequent layers in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. J. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.4 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofing system specification 4GIC according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, applicable recommendations of Johns Manville "Bituminous Roofing Binder", and requirements in this Section. B. tart installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Where roof slope exceeds 1/2 inch per 12 inches (1:24, contact the membrane manufacturer for installation instructions regarding installation direction and backnailing D. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing system. E. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is imminent. 1. Provide tie -offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. F. Asphalt Heating: Heat roofing asphalt and apply within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature unless otherwise required by roofing system manufacturer. Do not raise roofing asphalt temperature above equiviscous temperature range more than one hour before time of application. Do not exceed roofing asphalt manufacturer's recommended temperature limits during roofing asphalt heating. Do not heat roofing asphalt within 25 deg F (14 deg C) of flash point. Discard roofing asphalt maintained at a temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature for more than 4 hours. G. Substrate -Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. H. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.5 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION Select number of ply sheets from options in paragraph below. A. Install three ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. 1. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer, to form a uniform membrane without ply sheets touching. B. Cap Sheet: Install lapped granulated cap sheet starting at low point of roofing system. Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching. Lap in direction to shed water. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants. 1. Embed cap sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer. 3.6 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer. 2. Backer Sheet Application: Mechanically fasten backer sheet to walls or parapets. Adhere backer sheet over roofing membrane at cants in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. 3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at EVT. Apply hot roofing asphalt to back of flashing sheet if recommended by roofing system manufacturer. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing at a rate given by roofing system manufacturer. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 9 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07 5113 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 10 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed Products: a. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed equipment support flashing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field -assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each Item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of expansion joints and expansion joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. 6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 7. Details of special conditions. 8. Details of connections to adjoining work. 9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed. 1. Finish: 4 (polished directional satin). 2. Surface: Smooth, flat. C. Zinc -Tin Alloy -Coated Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead -soft, fully annealed stainless-steel sheet of minimum uncoated thickness indicated; coated on both sides with a zinc -tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin), with factory -applied gray preweathering. D. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat, and mill phosphatized for field painting. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex -washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory -applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Stainless -Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc -Tin Alloy -Coated Stainless -Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot -dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Solder: 1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. For Zinc -Tin Alloy -Coated Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin. 3. For Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. D. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. I. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. J. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.4 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through -Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96 -inch- long, but not exceeding 12 -foot- long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2 -inch- high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. 2. Zinc -Tin Alloy -Coated Stainless Steel: 0.015 inch thick. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate sill and similar flashings as detailed. Form sill flashing with 2 -inch- high end dams and embed in new saw cut at existing concrete openings. Fabricate from the following materials: SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant -filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant -type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre -tinning where pre -tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder metallic -coated steel sheet. 2. Pre -tinning is not required for zinc -tin alloy -coated stainless steel. 3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 4. Stainless -Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. 3.3 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall -opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous sill and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings or as detailed. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 6 J 7 3 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Solvent -release -curing joint sealants. 5. Acoustical joint sealants. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 2. Division 9 Section "'Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Joint -Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint -sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint -sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint -sealant formulation. 4. Joint -sealant color. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. E. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. F. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. H. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion -in -peel, and indentation hardness. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint -sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint -sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Liquid -Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stain -Test -Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single -Component, Pourable, Traffic -Grade, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, for Use T. 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 890 -SL. b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 728 SG. c. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 900 SL. e. Or approved equal. B. Mildew -Resistant, Single -Component, Acid -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS 1700. d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary. f. Or approved equal. 2.3 Multi -Component Self -Leveling Traffic Bearing Urethane Sealant: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Tremco; THC 900. b. Equal by Sika c. Equal by Sonneborn 2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single -Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 15LM. b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 921. c. Or approved equal. 2.5 SOLVENT -RELEASE -CURING JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic -Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Schnee -Morehead, Inc.; Acryl-R Acrylic Sealant. b. Tremco Incorporated; Mono 555. c. Or Architect approved equal. B. Butyl -Rubber -Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 300. b. Pecora Corporation; BC -158. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremco Butyl Sealant. d. Or Architect approved equal. 2.6 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC -20+. b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. c. Tremco; Tremflex 834. JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.7 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. c. Tremco Acoustical Sealant. 2.8 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin), Type 0 (open -cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint -sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Exterior insulation and finish systems. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint - sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. G. Installation of Preformed Silicone -Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone -sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside masking tape. 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound -rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations. JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry and cast -in-place concrete. 1. Joint Sealant: Single -component high performance low modulus non -sag urethane sealant . 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . B. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior perimeter joints between cast -in-place concrete or masonry and frames of doors, windows and louvers. Exterior joints between all other dissimilar materials. 1. Joint Sealant: Single -component high performance low modulus non -sag urethane sealant . 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . C. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior horizontal traffic bearing control and expansion joints in concrete. 1. Joint Sealant: Multi-component self -leveling urethane. 2. Joint -Sealant Color: Manufacture's standard gray. D. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior thresholds. 1. Joint Sealant: Non -hardening exterior polyisobutylene mastic. 2. Joint -Sealant Color: Manufacturers Standard.. E. Joint -Sealant Application : Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. 1. Joint Sealant: Single -component high performance low modulus nonsag urethane sealant 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . F. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. 1. Joint Sealant: Single -component mildew -resistant neutral -curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . G. Joint -Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. Joints between all other interior dissimilar materials. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 8 r INN KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 9 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 08 1113 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 2. Division 08 Section "Wood Doors" for wood doors in hollow metal frames. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing in steel doors and frames. 4. Division 09 Sections "Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 5. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. C. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM- HMMA 861. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire -resistance rating, temperature -rise ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details For each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. D. Submittal Sequence: Submit steel doors and frames product data and schedule concurrent with submissions of product data/schedules for hardware and wood doors. Coordinate submission of steel doors and frames with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. E. Concurrent Submittals: Submit product data and schedule for steel doors and frames concurrent 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4 -inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 2 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 4. Habersham Metal Products Company. 5. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 6. Kewanee Corporation (The). 7. Mesker Door Inc. 8. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 9. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. G. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-Ib/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." I. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: As indicated. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft -paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral -board, or vertical steel -stiffener core. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 a. Thermal -Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal -resistance value (R -value) of not less than that indicated on drawings when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 1) Locations: Exterior doors. 3. Vertical Edges for Single -Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Vertical Edges for Double -Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2 -1/8 -inch radius. 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042 -inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic -coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet unless metallic -coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. 1. Minimum reinforcement for closers: 14 gage. 2. Minimum reinforcement for locksets: 16 gage. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic -coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053 -inch- thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet unless metallic -coated sheet is indicated. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded. 3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053 -inch- thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053 -inch- thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 4 7 7 2 3 3 3 i 3 3 3 E KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 1. Minimum reinforcement for hinges: 10 gage. 2. Minimum reinforcement for closers: 14 gage. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap -and -stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not Tess than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In -Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8 -inch - diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not Tess than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Plasterguards: Provide plasterguards at all frames to be grouted. tFABRf, 2.8 ICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. C. Hollow Metal Doors: STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of .1 frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal -stud partitions. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as scheduled in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". Keep holes clear during construction. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSV/NAAMM-HMMA 861. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 63 3 3 i 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface -mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 Sections. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed Frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with HMMA 840. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. c. Install door silencers in frames. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor 3. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames set in masonry and concrete to be grouted. 4. Wood Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation behind frames. 5. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 6. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 7. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non -Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. D. Metallic -Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08 1113 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 9 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid -core doors with wood -veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames including fire -rated wood door frames. 2. Division 08 Section "Steel doors and frames" for steel frames for wood doors. 3. Division 08 Section "Door hardware" for hardware for wood doors. 4. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 5. Division 09 Sections "Painting" for field finishing doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indhcate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. C. Submittal Sequence: Submit wood door schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data for hardware and schedules for hollow metal doors/frames. Coordinate submission of wood door schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. D. Samples for Verification: FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited certification body. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42 -by -84 -inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3 -inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 2 r.. KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Lynden Door, plain sliced white maple, Stain Espresso #50, or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low -Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated. C. Particleboard -Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD -1 or Grade LD -2, made with binder containing no urea -formaldehyde resin. 2. Particleboard: Straw -based particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD -2 or M-2, except for density. 3. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard -core doors as needed to eliminate through -bolting hardware. D. Structural -Composite -Lumber -Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf. 2.3 VENEERED -FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: White Maple. 3. Cut: Plain Sliced. As selected by Architect. 4. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces. 5. Core: Particleboard. 6. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. 7. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid -wood louvers unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. B. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads as follows unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115 -W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full -width, solid -lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. Provide factory -installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING _AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish„ Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system. 3. Effect: Semi -filled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores. 4. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size., location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire - rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. 2. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 E. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08 1416 7 2 3 i a 3 3 3 3 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 6 3 2 INN vim KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 086250 - TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tubular daylighting devices and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Wood Framing; Site built wood curbs and nailers. B. Section 07310 - Roof Shingles and Shakes: Flashing of skylight base. C. Section 07320 - Roof Tiles: Flashing of skylight base. D. Section 07510 - Built -Up Bituminous Roofing: Flashing of skylight base. E. Section 07520 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Flashing of skylight base. F. Section 07530 - Electrometric Membrane Roofing: Flashing of skylight base. G. Section 07540 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Flashing of skylight base. H. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Metal curb flashings. I. Section 08620 - Unit Skylights: Skylights without reflective tube. J. Section 08630 - Metal Framed Skylights. K. Section 15810 - HVAC Air Distribution: Fan vent duct and connections. L. Section 16570 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls: Lighting controllers. M. Section 16150 - Common Work Results Electrical: Power cable, power supply and electrical connections. N. Section 16500 - Lighting Equipment and Controls: Control cable, dimming controls, light bulbs and lamps. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASTM A 463/A 463M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated, by the Hot Dip Process. D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized), by the Hot Dip Process. TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 E. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy - Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. F. ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. G. ASTM E 283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. H. ASTM E 308 - Standard Practice for Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the CIE System. I. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. J. ASTM E 547 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain walls by Cyclic Air Pressure Difference. K. ASTM E 1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. L. ASTM E 1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricane. M. ASTM D 635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of Self - Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position. N. ASTM D 1929 - Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics. O. ASTM D 2843 - Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics. P. AAMAIWDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights; 2011 Q. FM Standard 4431 - The Approval Standard for Skylights R. UL 2108 - Low Voltage Lighting Systems S. GSA-TS01-2003: Standard Test Method for Glazing and Window Systems Subject to Dynamic Overpressure Loadings T. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 4-010-01, Change October 2013, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings, U. CSA C22.2 No. 250.0 - Luminaires. V. ICC -ES AC -16 - Acceptance Criteria for Plastic Skylights; 2008. W. Florida Building Code TAS 201 - Impact Test Procedures. X. Florida Building Code TAS 202 - Criteria for Testing Impact and Non -Impact Resistant Building Envelope Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure Loading. Y. Florida Building Code TAS 203 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 2 7 3 3 NMI KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 Z. IBC Section 1710 - Load Test Procedure for Wind Load Testing on Rooftop Daylight Collecting System - Structural Performance Testing - Devised by ATI PE); 2012 AA. IBC Section 2606.7.2 - Installation - Diffuser Fall Out Test (Devised by PE); 2012 BB. OSHA 29 CFR - 1910.23 (e)(8) (Guarding Requirements for Skylights); 1926 Subpart M (Fall Protection); 1926.501(b)(4)(i); 1926.501(i)(2); 1926.501(b)(4)(ii) CC. California State OSHA Fall Protection Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 3212 (e)(1) 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Daylight Reflective Tubes: Ultra-high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance. Optical surface shall yield an average total- and specular -reflectance greater than 99.5% percent for the Visible Light spectrum (400 nm to 700 nm) and less than 25% reflectance for Infrared (IR) heat wavelengths (750 nm to 2500 nm) for minimized heat transmission. B. SOLAMASTER 330 DS -O / 330 DS -C (OPEN/CLOSED CEILING) 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/IS2/A440, Class CW-PG70, size tested 21 inch (533 mm) diameter, Type TDDOC and Type TDDCC. a. Air Infiltration Test: 1) Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf aperture with a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. b. Water Resistance Test: 1) No uncontrolled water leakage with a pressure differential of 10.7 psf (512 Pa) or 15 percent of the design load (whichever is greater) and a water spray rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf for 24 minutes when tested in accordance with ASTM E 547 and ASTM E 331. c. Uniform Load Test: All units tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM E 330. 1) No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make daylighting system inoperable or cause excessive permanent deflection of any section when tested at a Positive Load of 150 psf (7.18 kPa) or Negative Load of 70 psf (3.35 kPa). 2. Fire Testing: a. Fire Rated Roof Assemblies: 1) When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire rating requirements as described in the International Building Code for Class A, B, and C roof assemblies. b. When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire rating requirements as described in the International Building Code. c. Self -Ignition Temperature - Greater than 650 degrees F per ASTM D-1929. d. Smoke Density: Rating no greater than 450 per ASTM E 84 in way intended for use. Classification C. e. Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min (62 mm/min) Classification CC -2 per ASTM D 635. TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 f. Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burn Extent: 1 inch (25 mm) Classification CC -1 per ASTM D 635. 3. FM Certification: a. Spread of Flame: Passes: Class A at 5 in12 roof pitch. No flame spread when tested in accordance with FM modified version of ASTM E108 Fire Test of Roof Coverings. b. Simulated Hail Resistance (Pre -UV Exposure): Passes: No cracking or breaks when tested with nominal 2.0 in. (51 mm) diameter ice ball having a kinetic energy of 26.8 ft -lbs (36.4J) c. Simulated Hail Resistance (Post -UV Exposure): Passes: No cracking or breaks when tested with nominal 2.0 in. (51 mm) diameter ice ball having a kinetic energy of 26.8 ft -lbs (36.4J) after no less than 1000 hours of ultraviolet (UV) light exposure. d. Simulated Impact: Passes: No breakage or through openings when a 1001b (45.5 kg) weight dropped from 4 ft (1.2 m) above highest point of test sample. e. Simulated Wind Uplift: Passes: 195 psf Wind Rating. No separation, breaking or cracking occurred when tested in accordance with FM 4431. 4. Fall Protection Performance: a. Passes fall protection test: No penetration of dome or curb cap when subject to 400 lb (160 Kg)/42 inch (1066 mm) impact drop test when tested in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.506(c) Safety Net Systems. b. Passes fall protection test: California State OSHA Fall Protection Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 3212 (e)(1) Skylight Screens. 5. Blast Resistance: ASTM F1642, ASTM F2912, GSA-TS01-2003. and UFC 4-010-01: a. Airblast Loading ASTM Hazard Rating: Passes: No Hazard Rating b. Airblast Loading UFC Level of Protection: Passes Medium Level of Protection c. Dynamic Overpressure Loading ASTM Hazard Rating: Passes: No Hazard Rating d. Dynamic Overpressure Loading UFC Level of Protection: Passes Medium Level of Protection 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Data sheets showing roof dome assembly, flashing base, reflective tubes, diffuser assembly, and accessories. 4. Installation requirements. B. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including rough opening and framing dimensions, anchorage, roof flashings and accessories. C. Electrical wiring diagrams and recommendations for power and control wiring, if applicable. D. Samples for verification: As requested by Architect. TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 E. Test Reports: Independent testing agency or evaluation service reports verifying compliance with specified performance requirements. F. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the requirements of Credit will be met: 1. List of Daylight Credits available for the products specified. 2. Data on Energy Optimization Performance Credits for the products specified. 3. Data on Perimeter and Non -Perimeter Controllability of Systems for use of Daylight Dimmer option with the products specified. 4. Data on potential Innovation in Design Credits which may be available for the innovative use of the products specified. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in manufacture of tubular daylighting devices for minimum 20 years. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Daylighting Device: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years. B. Electrical Parts: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 5 years, unless otherwise indicated. C. LED Emitters, Drivers and Controls: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 3 years against failure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Solatube International, Inc., which is located at: Solatube International 2210 Oak Ridge Way; Vista, CA 92081-8341; Toll Free Tel: 888-765-2882; Tel: 760-477-1120; Fax: 760-597-4488; Email:request info (commsales:`u,solatube.com); Web:www.solatube.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES A. Tubular Daylighting Devices General: Transparent roof -mounted skylight dome and self - flashing curb, reflective tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces; complying with ICC AC -16. B. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 330 DS, 21 inch (530 mm) Daylighting System: 1. Model: a. Solatube Model 330 DS -C Open Ceiling. AAMA Type TDDCC. 2. Capture Zone: a. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube. 1) Outer Dome Glazing: Type DA, 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) minimum thickness injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material; UV inhibiting (100 percent UV C, 100 percent UV B and 98.5 percent UV A), impact modified acrylic blend. a) Raybender 3000: Variable prism optic molded into outer dome to TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 capture low angle sunlight and limit high angle sunlight. 2) Acrylic Dome plus Inner Dome Glazing: Type DAI, Inner Dome is 0.115 inch (3 mm) minimum thickness acrylic classified as CC2 material. b. Tube Ring: 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) nominal thickness injection molded high impact PVC. Prevents thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture. Attached to base of dome ring with butyl glazing rope 0.24 inch (6 mm) diameter; to minimize air infiltration. c. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip, 0.63 inch (16 mm) tall by 0.28 inch (7 mm) wide. 3. Dome Options: a. Security Bar: Type B Security Bar 0.375 inch (95 mm) stainless steel bar across flashing diameter opening. b. Security Kit: Type SK Dome Security Kit, rivets with nylon spacers to replace dome screws. c. Dome Edge Protection Band for Curb Cap: Type PBC, for fire rated Class A, B or C roof applications with 330 DS Domes on Curb Cap Flashing installations. Galvanized steel. Nominal thickness of 0.039 inch (1 mm). For use with Curb Cap Flashing (Type FC), only. 4. Flashings: a. Roof Flashing Base: 1) One Piece: One piece, seamless, leak -proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. Sheet steel, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 463/A 463M or ASTM A792/A 792M, 0.028 inch (0.7 mm) plus or minus .006 inch (.015 mm) thick. a) Base Style: Type FC, Curb cap, with inside dimensions of 27 inches by 27 inches (685 mm by 685 mm) to cover curb as specified in Section 07600. b. Flashing Options: 1) Curb Insulator: Curb Insulator, Type CI, Thermal isolation material is for use under flashing Type FC. 5. Transfer Zone: a. Extension Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch (0.5 mm) conforming to ASTM B 209. 1) Reflective Tubes: a) Reflective extension tube, Type EXX and Type EL with total length of run as indicated on the Drawings. b) Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity with INFRAREDuction Technology combining ultra-high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance. 2) Tube Options a) Extension Tube Angle Adapter: Provide manufacturer's standard adapters for applications requiring: 1) Type Al one 0 to 90 degree extension tube angle adapter. b) Top Tube Angle Adapter and Bottom Tube Angle Adapter Kit: Type AK, Reflective 45 degree adjustable top and bottom angle adapters (one each), 16 inches (406 mm) long 6. Delivery Zone: a. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Solatube Model 330 DS- C. Ceiling mounted box transitioning from round tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube; TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 23.8 inches by 23.8 inches (605 mm by 605 mm) square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings. 1) Polymeric Transition Box: Type TP, round -to -square transition box made of opaque polymeric material, classified as CC2, Class C, 0.110 inch (2.8 mm) thick. 2) Lens: Type L1, OptiView Fresnel lens design to maximize light output and diffusion with extruded aluminum frame and EPDM foam seal to minimize condensation and bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm) thick. Classified as CC2. 3) Supplemental Natural Effect Lens Type LN, Lens made of acrylic, classified as CC2, Class C, 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) thick, with open cell foam seal to minimize condensation and bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283. 7. Catalog Number: S330DS-C-DAI-B-SK-PBC-FC-CI-AK-EXX-AI-TP-LI-LN 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non -corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon. B. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling system requirement. C. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 3.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions. C. If substrate and rough opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.4 PREPARATION TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit and wiring. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Coordinate installation with substrates, air and vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that finished installation is weather tight. 1. Install flashing to produce weatherproof seal with curb and overlap with roofing system termination at top of curb. 2. Provide thermal isolation when components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in rough opening to maintain continuity of thermal barriers. 3. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier material. C. Where metal surfaces of tubular unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including preservative -treated wood, provide permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer D. Align device free of warp or twist, maintain dimensional tolerances. E. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test in presence of Owner, Architect, or Contractor, or their designated representative. Correct if needed before proceeding with installation of subsequent units. F. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each fixture to verify operation, control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Horizontal sliding doors 2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for steel doors and frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors and frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data for hardware and schedules for hollow metal doors/frames and wood doors. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. b. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and date each page. c. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. d. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for door hardware. 7) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. C. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. D. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, from the manufacturer. 1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire -rated doors complies with listed fire -rated door assemblies. E. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. F. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. D. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated. DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 E. Smoke- and Draft -Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft -control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3 -inch wg) of water. F. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. G. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. H. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non -Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Requirements for access control. 5. Address for delivery of keys. J. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Owner's office. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing -in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. C. Electrical System Roughing -In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. (1) LH and (1) RH Lockset. 2. (2) Panic Device. 3. (1) LH and (1) RH closers. 4. (2) Mortise cylinder, less core. 5. (5) Interchangable cores, uncombinated. 6. (20) key blanks. 7. (2) Electric strtikes. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products complying with BHMA designations referenced. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. 2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations and requirements for description, quality, and function. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fire -Rated Applications: a. Machine Screws: For the following: 1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames. b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface -mounted exit devices. 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow -metal doors. 4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 5. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.3 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.4 MANUFACTURERS A. No substitutions are allowed unless reviewed and accepted by Architect and Owner in accordance with Division 1 requirements. 2.5 BUTT HINGES A. Manufacturers listed: Stanley. Accepted: Hager, McKinney, Bommer 1. FBB 168 (Interior Heavy Use Doors) 652 2. FBB 179 (Interior Light Use Doors) 652 3. Furnish NRP on all doors with locks A. Hinge width shall be as required to clear projecting trim allowing maximum degree of opening. B. Quantity: 1. 1-1/2 pair up to and including 90" in height, minimum, or as scheduled. DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No_ 2017036 2. 2 pair over 90" in height, minimum, or as scheduled. 3. 2 pair for doors greater 3'6" and greater in width, or as scheduled. 2.6 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, AND DEADLOCKS A. Manufacturer listed: Best or equal as approved by owner. B. Design: Heavy Duty Mortise 45H, 14M trim 626 C. Mortise Locksets: All locksets and latchsets shall be the product of one manufacturer. All locksets and latchsets shall be heavy duty U.L. approved for use on fire doors with 3/4" latchbolt. Functions as indicated in the hardware groups. A. Provide curved lip strikes. Furnish flat lipped strikes on locks with pairs of doors with overlapping astragal B. Locksets and latchsets shall be furnished with sufficient strike lip to protect trim. C. All locks shall have wrought box strikes. D. Provide 1E74 cylinders with 7 -pin interchangeable core for mortise locksets, exit devices, and removable mullions. E. Provide cylinder with interchangeable core for Best Locks Series 5L cabinet locks. See drawings for locations. 2.7 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Electric Strikes: Hanchett Entry Systems, Inc. (HES). 5200 Series. 2.8 MANUAL HEAD AND FOOT BOLTS A. Trimco 3913 with open strike plate at head and dust proof strike plate as sill. 2.9 DUTCH DOOR BOLTS A. Trimco 318951 cast dutch door bolt with optional mortise strike plate. 2.10 WALL STOPS A. Manufacturer listed: Trimco. B. Trimco 1270CXCP Wall Stop (Interior) 626 cast wall stop with convex rubber stop. 2.11 FLOOR STOPS DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Manufacturer listed: Trimco. B. Trimco 1215 low half dome 626. 2.12 PUSH/PULL PLATES A. Manufacturer listed: Trimco B. Trimco 1001-3 x 1018-3B 4x 16 (CFC where required) 630. 2.13 OVERHEAD STOPS A. Manufacturer listed: Glynn -Johnson. B. 90S Series surface mounted overhead stop, size as recommended by Manufacturer. 2.14 DOOR SILENCERS A. Manufacturer listed: Pemko. B. Quantity: Furnish three (3) for each single door frame, and four (4) for each pair of door frames. C. Type: 1229A. 2.15 EXIT DEVICES, REMOVABLE MULLIONS, POWER SUPPLIES, and POWER TRANSFERS A. Precision. 2100 Series, 630 finish. 1. Power supplies for electrified exit devices: Precision ELR with battery backup BT -150- 07. 2. Power transfer for electrified exit devices: Von Duprin EPT-10. B. Cylinders with interchangeable core to match mortise locksets. Trim style to match mortise locksets. 2.16 CLOSERS A. Manufacturer: LCN. 1. LCN 4041 CUSH or EDA on exterior 689 2. 4041 CUSH or EDA on interior out swing openings 689 3. 4041 REG on interior inswing openings 689 4. Furnish with SNB B. Provide drop plates where required for installation on narrow top rails. DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.17 GASKETS AND SWEEPS A. Manufacturer: PEMKO. B. 290AS (at head and jambs —surface mount) C. 18100CP (at sill on door — surface mount) 2.18 DRIP CAP A. Manufacturer: PEMKO. B. 346 C (4" wider than door width) 2.19 THRESHOLD A. Manufacturer: PEMKO. B. Extruded aluminum, saddle style, 5" x I/4", Pemko 271 A. 2.20 AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOM A. Manufacturer: PEMKO. B. 4301CPKL. 2.21 ACOUSTICAL SEAL A. Manufacturer: PEMKO. B. 379CR adjustable door seal at head and jambs 2.22 HINGE GUARDS A. Fingershield Safety, Inc, Ponte Vedra Beach, Florida B. Provide push -side hinge guard # 83PUSH and pull -side hinge guard # 83 PULL at all doors scheduled to receive hinge guards. Field cut to length for non-standard height doors. Color as selected by Architect from manufacture's standard. 2.23 KEYING A. All lockset and cylinder cores for this project shall be keyed to the existing grandmaster system. 1. Provide steel construction cores and keys during the construction period. DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 9 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. The Finish Hardware Supplier shall meet with the Owner to prepare the permanent keying schedule. 3. The permanent cores and keys (prepared according to the accepted keying schedule) shall be transmitted directly to the Owner, prior to occupancy. The General Contractor shall remove the construction cores and install the permanent cores. All construction cores shall be returned to the finish hardware supplier by the General Contractor. 4. All permanent cores, keys, and uncombinated cores, shall be sent via Registered Mail, Return Receipt Request to the Owner. 5. Stamp all keys with change designation as directed. 6. Stamp all keys with "Do Not Duplicate". 7. Furnish: a. One (1) Building Grand Master Key. b. One (1) Control Key. c. Three (3) Master Keys for each master key in keying system. d. Two (2) operating level keys per Lockset or Cylinder. e. Ten (10) Construction Operating Keys and two (2) construction control keys. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire -rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSUSDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 10 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. E. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening with electrified door hardware. F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Stops: Provide wall stops for doors unless other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Where wall stops can not be installed, provide overhead stops. Do not use floor stops. H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 11 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training." 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE HARWARE GROUP NO. 01 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION 3 EA HINGE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK 1 EA WALL STOP 3 EA SILENCER CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 AL53PD JUP WS401CCV S88D HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02 - NOT USED EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION 3 EA HINGE CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP FINISH MFR 652 IVE 613 SCH 613 IVE GRY IVE FINISH MFR 630 IVE DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 12 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 9th, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE RIM CYLINDER SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE GASKETING DOOR SWEEP THRESHOLD GASKETING HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION END OF SECTION 08 7100 98 -NL -F 20-057 1461 EDA FC 8400 10" X 2" LDW B -CS 50AA-S 39A 655A-223 188SBK PSA CATALOG NUMBER HARDWARE BY DOOR /FRAME MANUFACTURER 626 VON 626 SCH 689 LCN 630 IVE AA ZER A ZER A ZER BK ZER FINISH MFR DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 13 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Storefront framing. 3. Interior borrowed lites. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" 2. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" 3. Division 08 Section "Aluminum Framed Windows" 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Snow Loads: Per Structural drawings. 3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short -duration load. 4. Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design glass to resist each of the following combinations of loads: a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design on glass type factors for short -duration load. GLAZING 08 8000 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 b. Inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus half of the design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for short -duration load. c. Half of the inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus the design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for long -duration load. 5. Glass Type Factors for Wired, Patterned, and Sandblasted Glass: a. Short -Duration Glass Type Factor for Wired Glass: 0.5. b. Long -Duration Glass Type Factor for Wired Glass: 0.3. c. Short -Duration Glass Type Factor for Patterned Glass: 1.0. d. Long -Duration Glass Type Factor for Patterned Glass: 0.6. e. Short -Duration Glass Type Factor for Sandblasted Glass: 0.5. 6. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest part of the glass. 7. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001. 8. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center -of -glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short -side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 9. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and sealants, in 12 -inch lengths. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. B. Preconstruetion adhesion and compatibility test report. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating -Glass Units with Sputter -Coated, Low -E Coatings: A qualified insulating -glass manufacturer who is approved by coated -glass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. GLAZING 08 8000 - 2 7 1 aid NINO KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type and/or frame manufacturer. F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB -3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. Fire -Protection -Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire -protection -rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose -stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire -resistance rating in minutes. J. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions_ Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. GLAZING 08 8000 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat -strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat- treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic -protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 2 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 1. Large -Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small -Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet above grade. 3. Large -Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For laminated -glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. U -Factors: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 5. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality -Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality -Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). 4. Spandrel Glazing where indicated. Color to be selected by architect from manufactures standard colors. GLAZING 08 8000 - 4 • • • KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.3 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or cast -in-place and cured -transparent -resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. B. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, with "Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance" Paragraph in "Glass Products, General" Article, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with one of the following to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations: a. Polyvinyl butyral interlayer. b. Polyvinyl butyral interlayers reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film. c. Ionoplast interlayer. d. Cast -in-place and cured -transparent -resin interlayer. e. Cast -in-place and cured -transparent -resin interlayer reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Laminated -Glass Types" Article. 2.4 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating -Glass Units: Factory -assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating -Glass Types" Article. 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. GLAZING 08 8000 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed -cell, integral -skinned neoprene, EPDM, silicone, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure -glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. C. Lock -Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock -strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black. 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. D. Glazing Sealant: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. E. Glazing Sealant: Acid -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. GLAZING 08 8000 - 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Interior, Decorative Window Film: Single patterned film. Visible Light Transmission not greater than 52 percent. Shading Coefficient not less than .73. G. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. H. Perimeter Insulation for Fire -Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire - protection rating indicated. 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.10 MONOLITHIC -GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type GL -<1>: Clear float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide "etched" glazing patterns where indicated on drawings. GLAZING 08 8000 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Glass Type GL -<2>: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. 2.11 LAMINATED -GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type GL -<3>: Laminated Glass at Canopy. 1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6.0 mm. 2. Interlayer Thickness: As required. 3. Interlayer Color: White. 4. Provide safety glazing labeling. 2.12 INSULATING -GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type GL -<4>: Insulating glass at Storefront — clear 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: Per manufacturer. 3. Select to give an overall performance rating of the window assembly as follows: a. U -Value: 0.46 maximum (total assembly) b. SHGC: U-0.40 or lower c. VLT: 0.4 - 0.5 B. Glass Type GL -<5>: Insulating glass at Storefront — spandrel 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: Per manufacturer. 3. Select to give an overall performance rating of the window assembly as follows: a. U -Value: 0.46 maximum (total assembly) b. SHGC: NA c. VLT: NA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. GLAZING 08 8000 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. GLAZING 08 8000 - 9 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. .re D. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure - glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. GLAZING 10 08 8000 - KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 LOCK -STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of chit, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08 8000 GLAZING 11 08 8000 - KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 09 2400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 054000 "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing and water-resistant barriers included in portland cement plaster assemblies. 3. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders included in portland cement plaster assemblies. 4. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support lath and portland cement plaster. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory -prepared finish coat indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory -prepared, colored, textured finish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sound -Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified testing agency. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 2400 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Interior Plasterwork: Maintain room temperatures at greater than 40 deg F for at least 48 hours before plaster application, and continuously during and after application. 1. Avoid conditions that result in plaster drying out during curing period. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster. 2. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydrating plaster in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during plaster application and until plaster is dry. C. Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. D. Factory -Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for ..r environmental conditions for applying finishes. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL LATH A. Expanded -Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Diamond -Mesh Lath: Flat, 2.5 lb/sq. yd. B. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I, [Grade D, Style 2 vapor -permeable paper] [Grade B, Style la vapor -retardant paper] <Insert requirements>. 1. Provide paper -backed lath [unless otherwise indicated] [at exterior locations] [in locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations>. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 2400 - 2 tir KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Metal Accessories: 1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating. 2. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. 3. External -Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel. a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners. c. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing masonry corners. d. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use at locations indicated on Drawings. 5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc -coated (galvanized) steel]; square - edged style; with expanded flanges. 6. Control Joints: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc -coated (galvanized) steel]; one -piece - type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline -resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal -to -metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads. E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475 -inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. B. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 2400 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Colorants for Job -Mixed Finish Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color to match exterior paint color PT -3. D. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 1. Color for Job -Mixed Finish Coats: White. F. Acrylic -Based Finish Coatings: Factory -mixed acrylic -emulsion coating systems, formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic -based finishes. 1. Color: exterior paint color PT -3. 2.5 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base -coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials. B. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three -coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part portland cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part portland cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. C. Factory -Prepared Finish -Coat Mixes: For acrylic -based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 2400 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Expanded -Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond -mesh lath. 3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 1. Install lath -type, external -corner reinforcement at exterior locations. C. Control Joints: Install control joints at Locations indicated on Drawings. 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10 -foot straightedge placed on surface. 2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field -applied finishes indicated. B. Acrylic -Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 PLASTER REPAIRS A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 3.7 PROTECTION PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 2400 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 09 2400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 09 2400 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Metal Studs B. Related Sections incllude the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 2. Division 09 panting Sections surface finish. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the folllowing products: 1. Textured Finishes: 12" x 12" for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold -formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 3. Drawings are required to be stamped by a Licensed engineer in the State of Washington 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. GYSPUM BOARD 092900 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Install) mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL STUDS A. Requirements: 1. Gauges: Per framing engineer 2. Depth: Per drawings 3. Spacing: Per framing engineer engineer 4. Deflection: Maximum deflection is L/240. 2.2 PANELS, GENERAL A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 20 percent by weight. B. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. GYSPUM BOARD 092900 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G -P Gypsum. c. USG Corporation. d. EcoRock B. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5 ; inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold -resistant core and surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. U -Bead J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use all-purpose compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. GYSPUM BOARD 092900 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high -build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to wood members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. C. Sheetrock acoustical sealant; HW -D-0206, manufactured by United States Gypsum, Inc. D. Sheet steel blocking: Provide blocking where indicated on drawings and where wall mounted accessories and casework are shown. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Corner Guards 1. Manufacturer: Inpro Corporation 2. Type: 90degree Stainless Steel Surface Mount 11/2" Wing 3. Finish to 48" Above Finish Floor 4. Location: as indicated on finish plan PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded) hollow -metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. GYSPUM BOARD 092900 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: All locations except as noted. 2. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Type: Provide at all wet areas such as bathrooms and rooms with sinks. 3. Cement backer boards: At all locations to receive tile finishes. Install per manufacturers instructions. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. GYSPUM BOARD 092900 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. On Z -furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated. 3. U -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Control Joints are required as indicated on drawings, use a PVC joint to conform to ASTM standards D3678 and C1047. Mud and tape over the control joints to create a smooth joint. The gap between panels is to be no wider than 1/4". E. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: All locations exposed to view, no sprayed textures. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. GYSPUM BOARD 092900 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Indications that panels are rnold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYSPUM BOARD 092900 - 7 11101 r e KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical tiles for ceilings and the following: 1. Concealed suspension systems. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light -Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a. Furnish layouts for cast -in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling -mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, skylights, and special moldings. 5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123- 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory -applied color finishes. D. Samples of verification: Provide 1 sample of ceiling tiles specified. E. Qualification Data: For testing agency. F. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified. B. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical tile ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical tiles with the following surface - burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: a. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. E. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical tile ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: 1. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies -- Seismic Zones 3 & 4." 2. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" : Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123- 2 3 3 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical tiles and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including fight fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Grid: ASTM C636, intermediate duty exposed T; components die cut and interlocking. B. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. C. Grid Finish: Match panel color. D. Support Channels and Hangers: Size and type to suit application and seismic requirements. E. Hold down clips: Manufacturer's standard. F. Manufacturer and Products 1. USG DX 15/16", or equal by Armstrong or Celotex. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A. Acoustical Ceiling Tile (ACT) ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123- 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Product: Armstrong Fine Fissured Second Look, or approved equal. 2. Size: 24" x 48" x3/4" 3. Sag Resistance: HumiGuard Plus 4. Fire Resistance: Class A 5. Color: White 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung" ) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch diameter wire. E. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; 2. USG Interiors, Inc.;. B. Direct -Hung, Double -Web Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from and capped with cold -rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G30 (Z90) coating designation. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. Access: Upward and end pivoted, with initial access openings of size indicated below and located throughout ceiling within each module formed by main and cross runners, with additional access available by progressively removing remaining acoustical tiles. 2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123- 4 3 j j a 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Available Products Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 3. Fry Reglet Corporation; 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; B. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Shadow Molding profile, formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealantc:omplying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical tile ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123- 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION, SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power -actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123- 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows: 1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. G. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile -to -tile joints are closed by double lap of material. 1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile. 2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf -type, spring -steel spacers between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123- 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories/transition strips B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard -size samples, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. D. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Reducer strip profiles as recommended by manufacturer. Submit colors for Architect's selection. E. Maintenance Instructions: Complete instructions for cleaning, sealing and waxing for high traffic commercial use. Include detailed procedures, materials, schedules and equipment required for both initial cleaning/sealing and periodic cleaning/sealing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. C. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. D. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE (RB -1) A. Base: Rubber, top set, coved 1. Height: 4 inch, typical 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch thick 3. Length: 4 foot sections or roll. 4. Manufacturer and Product: Johnsonite 5. Color: 140 Fawn. 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Transition Strips: resilient, profiles as recommended by manufacturer for various transition conditions, color to be selected by Architect. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Miter internal corner. At external corners, cut back of base strip to 273 of its thickness and fold. At exposed ends, use pre -molded units. H. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Provide protective building paper to finished surfaces. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Tukwila, Washington 700 Building Renovations BID SET October 27, 2011 SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes rubber sheet flooring. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified in manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6 -by -9 -inch sections. 1. For heat -welding bead, manufacturer's standard -size Samples, but not Tess than 9 inches long, of each color required. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of resilient sheet flooring indicated. D. Welded -Seam Samples: For seamless -installation technique indicated and for each resilient sheet flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6 -by -9 -inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. E. Product Schedule: For resilient sheet flooring. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Tukwila, Washington 700 Building Renovations BID SET October 27, 2011 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for resilient sheet flooring including resilient base and accessories. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color and pattern in locations directed by Owner. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient sheet flooring installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient sheet flooring installation. E. Install resilient sheet flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART2-PRODUCTS RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Tukwila, Washington 700 Building Renovations BID SET October 27, 2011 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq.. cm. B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification. C. Low -Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.2 UNBACKED VINYL SHEET FLOORING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Forbo Industries, Inc; B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1913. C. Thickness: 0.080 inch. D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer. E. Seamless -Installation Method: Heat welded. F. Colors and Patterns: 1. LINO -1 FORBO Marmoleum 3146 Serene Grey 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALSrowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 60 g/L or Tess. 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." B. Seamless -Installation Accessories: 1. Heat -Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid -strand product for heat welding seams. a. Color: Match flooring. 2. Chemical -Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams. a. Bonding compound shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Tukwila, Washington 700 Building Renovations BID SET October 27, 2011 b. Bonding compound shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. Integral -Flash -Cove -Base Accessories: 1. Cove Strip: 1 -inch radius provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. 2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. 3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor -polish products recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor -emission rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 4 OM awl KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Tukwila, Washington 700 Building Renovations BID SET October 27, 2011 b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates •with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient sheet flooring. 3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring. B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low -traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. I. Seamless Installation: 1. Heat -Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY Tukwila, Washington 700 Building Renovations BID SET October 27, 2011 2. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical -bonding compound to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on flooring surfaces. J. Integral -Flash -Cove Base: Cove resilient sheet flooring 6 inches up vertical surfaces. Support flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. 1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet flooring. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from flooring surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply three coat(s). E. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular carpet tile. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) long Samples. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation prior to adhering to substrate. Approval needed by Owner. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard." 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated but no less than 10 sq. yd. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER: Basis of Design Interface, Inc. 2.2 CARPET TILE: CPT -1: This is a blend of the 6 different carpets below and the percentage of use is indicated by each product. A. Field Carpet 1 1. Manufacturer: Interface 2. Pattern: Sew Straight 14620002500 3. Color: 102403 Satin 4. Size: 20 x 20 5. Installation Pattern: Brick Ashlar North to South 6. Percentage of Field: 60% B. Field Carpet 2 1. Manufacturer: Interface 2. Pattern: Primary Stitch 1462102500 3. Color: 102415 Satin/Accent 4. Size: 20 x 20 5. Installation Pattern: Brick Ashlar North to South 6. Percentage of Field: 28% C. Accent Carpet 1 1. Manufacturer: Interface 2. Pattern: Viva Colores 146500250H TILE CARPETING 096813 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Color: 101159 Color Teja 4. Size: 20 x 20 5. Installation Pattern: Brick Ashlar North to South 6. Percentage of Field: 2% D. Accent Carpet 2 1. Manufacturer: Interface 2. Pattern: Viva Colores 146500250H 3. Color: 101171 CANO 4. Size: 20 x 20 5. Installation Pattern: Brick Ashlar North to South 6. Percentage of Field: 2% E. Accent Carpet 4 1. Manufacturer: Interface 2. Pattern: Viva Colores 146500250H 3. Color: 101126 Verde Primavera 4. Size: 20 x 20 5. Installation Pattern: Brick Ashlar North to South 6. Percentage of Field: 2% 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining, pressure -sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. C. Transition Strips: 1. Manufacturer: Roppe 2. Color: 193 Black Brown 3. Location: As indicated on plan 4. Use a single continuous strip where possible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3 3 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 4 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face -beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS '11/ A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Fiber Cement. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 4. Wood. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 3. Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on exterior wood substrates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not Less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions,. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kelly -Moore Paints. 2. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3. B. Wood -Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.. B. Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: MPI #95. 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS A. Primer, Latex for Exterior Wood: MPI #6. 2.6 WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Exterior Semi -Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Wood: 15 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. F. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 G. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit. e. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi -gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11. B. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized -metal substrates with topcoat indicated. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi -gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11. C. Aluminum Substrates: 1. Latex System: EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 6 ONE KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi -gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11. D. Wood Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood, MPI #6. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi -gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT COLORS A. Color A or PT -1: Sherwin-Williams SW7504 Keystone Gray B. Color B or PT -3: Sherwin-Williams SW2848 Roycroft Pewter C. Color C or PT -4: Sherwin-Williams SW0006 Toile Red D. Color: D & Dark Bronze PT -2 Sherwin-Williams SW7020 Black Fox END OF SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 7 ism KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Wood. 4. Gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for verificatllon for each color and finish specified C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List.' INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 INII KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 MIN 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Kelly -Moore Paints. 2. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). •+ 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 EMI KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Provide materials for use with in each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. VOC Content of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti -Corrosive and Anti -Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 7. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 8. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 9. Anti -Corrosive and Anti -Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 13. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. 14. Dry -Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L. 15. Zinc -Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L. 16. Pre -Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L. C. Chemical Components of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti -corrosive and anti -rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di -n -butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2 -dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1 -trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule on drawings. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. B. Wood -Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. B. Quick -Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. C. Waterborne Galvanized -Metal Primer: MPI #134. 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex -Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 2.6 LATEX PAINTS A. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5). B. High -Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5). 2.7 ALKYD PAINTS A. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5). INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.8 OIL BASED WOOD STAIN: MPI #90 A. Interior Oil Based Wood Stain. 2.9 EPDXY PAINTS A. Pro -Industrial Waterborne Catalyzed Epoxy MPI # 115 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface - applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. E. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. F. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. G. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field painting. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying - paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Steel Substrates: 1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.1R. a. b. c. Prime Coat: Quick -drying alkyd metal primer. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex semi -gloss. B. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: 1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.3M. a. b. c. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized -metal primer. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: High-performance architectural semi -gloss. C. Gypsum Board Substrates Standard: 1. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C. a. b. c. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Interior latex eggshell. D. Gypsum Board and Plywood Substrates at wet locations and restrooms: 1. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C -G5 a. b. c. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. Topcoat: Interior alkyd egg semi -gloss 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT COLORS A. PT -5 Sherwin-Williams B. PT -6 Sherwin-Williams C. PT -7 Sherwin-Williams D. PT -8 Sherwin-Williams E. PT -9 Sherwin-Williams F. PT -10 Sherwin-Williams G. PT -11 Sherwin-Williams SW7009 Pearly White SW7006 Extra White SW2841 Weathered Shingle SW0033 Rembrandt Ruby SW6235 Foggy Day SW6417 Tupelo Tree SW2841 Weathered Shingle END OF SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8 sirs KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates: a. Miscellaneous wood trim. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting". 2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for approval or Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each cokor selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate. a. Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. VT Industries 2. Kelly -Moore Paints. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by rnanufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. 2.3 WOOD FILLERS A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91. 2.4 PRIMERS AND SEALERS A. Shellac: MPI #88. 2.5 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES A. Varnish, Aliphatic Polyurethane, Two -Component (Gloss Level 3): MPI #78. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample wood finishing materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying wood finishes if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces before refinishing with complying materials if the two finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are aesthetically unacceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions., with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 13 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. C. Interior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Apply wood filler paste to open -grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR WOOD -FINISH -SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Wood substrates, including wood trim, glued -laminated construction, and car decking. 1. Clear, Two -Component Polyurethane System: a.. Prime Coat: Two -component polyurethane matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Two -component polyurethane matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two -component, Gloss Level 3, MPI #78. d. Color: Stain White Maple Ravine RA02 by VT industries. END OF SECTION 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 101423.16 - ROOM -IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes room -identification signs that are directly attached to the building. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Furnish templates for placement of sign -anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers. B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For room -identification signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. D. Product Schedule: For room -identification signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings or specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products. ROOM-IDENTIF.[CATION PANEL SIGNAGE 101423.16 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify locations by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1. 2.2 ROOM -IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Room -Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. ASI-Modulex, Inc., or approved equal. 1 B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1. PVC Sheet: 0.060 -inch- thick, extruded, high -impact PVC plastic in color to match face color. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Square. 4. Mounting: Unframed. a. Wall mounted with concealed anchors. b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered. 5. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with contrasting colors. ROOM -IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 101423.16 - 2 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square -cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. 1. Panel Material: Clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating, subsurface applied. 2. Raised -Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. D. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended. 1. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SIGN MATERIALS A. Vinyl Film: UV -resistant vinyl film with pressure -sensitive, permanent adhesive; die cut to form characters or images suitable for exterior applications. B. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. Exposed Metal -Fastener Components, General: a.. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened sign unless otherwise indicated. b. Fastener Heads: Use [flathead] [or] [oval countersunk] <Insert shape> screws and boats with tamper --resistant [Allen -head] [spanner -head] [or] [one -way - head] <Insert slot design> slots unless otherwise indicated. 3. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly unless otherwise indicated. b. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, and installed in predrilled holes. ROOM -IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 101423.16 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. B. Accessibility: Install signs in locations on walls {according to the accessibility standard . C. Wall -Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. ROOM -IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 101423.16 - 4 sir KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101423.16 ROOM -IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 101423.16 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 PART 1 SECTION 10 2220 — DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS PART 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 2.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1. Single source for movable partitions, inclusive of frames, glass, doors, door hardware, and electrical components were specified. 2. Moveable partitions includes sliding, wood with optional glass lite doors and glazing, manufactured and installed with demountable partitions. 3. Supply and coordination of conduit, boxes and electrical duplexes into electrical and communication components where specified — demountable partitions, other than products specified in this section, are owner provided and installed by others. 2.2 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 064000 - Architectural Woodwork: Architectural millwork suspended from wall. 2. Section 081416 — Flush Wood Doors. 3. Section 087100] - Door Hardware: Door hardware. 4. Section 088000 - Glazing: Glazing for glass panels and doors. 2.3 REFERENCES 1. ASCE 7-05 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 2. ASTM E72-04- Method for Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 3. ASTM E84-05 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. ASTM E90-97- Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 5. ASTM E413-87- Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. 2.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Structural Performance: Provide demountable partitions capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: a. Transverse -Load Capacity of Wall System: Lateral deflection of not more than 1/120 (solid Wall) and 1/175 (glass wall) of the overall span when tested under a uniformly distributed load of 0.24 kN/m2 (5 psf) in accordance with ASTM E72. 2. Seismic Performance: Provide demountable partitions capable of withstanding effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. a. Spectral Accelerations for Short Periods (Ss): 18.7% g. b. Spectral Accelerations for a 1 -Second Period (Si): 6.3% g. c. Provide miscellaneous steel framing not shown on drawings which is required to satisfy seismic criteria. DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 2220 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1. Coordination: a. Coordinate other work having a direct bearing on work of this section, including other work required to be installed within or next to Work of this section. 2. Schedule: a. Coordinate delivery of product in accordance with construction schedule to avoid storage and double handling of the wall system. b. Installation of wall system in conjunction with other trades after completion of HVAC equipment, fire suppression, ceiling grid, finished drywall ceiling, floor covering, and lighting fixtures. Final electrical connection, voice data/communications, ceiling tiles, can be completed during or after installation of the wall systems. 2.6 SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: Provide product information for each type of product indicated in this specification. 2. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings for demountable partitions. a. Include plans, elevations, sections, connection details, and attachment details to other work. b. Include critical field measurements for [standard] [custom] modular installation, including finished width and height of partitions. •• c. Provide structural analysis data for installed products indicated to comply with design loads, signed and sealed by licensed professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 3. Coordination Drawings: 4. Samples: Provide samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, in sample size indicated below. a. Panel Finish Face and Extrusion Components: Manufacturer's standard size unit, but not less than 75 mm (3 inches) square. b. Linear Trim: 300 mm (12 inches) long. c. Door Face Finish: Manufacturer's standard sized unit, but not less than 75 mm (3 inches) square. d. Glazing: Manufacturer's standard sized unit, but not less than 75 mm (3 inches) square. 714 2.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE !' 1. Sound Transmission Characteristics: a. Where STC ratings are indicated, provide partitions with STC rating determined 19 by testing an identical system to ASTM E90 and classified in accordance with ti .r ASTM E413. b. Testing to be done by a qualified independent testing agency. DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 2220 - 2 .+► KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labelled in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Mechanical Strength of Demountable Partitions: Provide demountable partitions capable of withstanding static loads in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA X5.6. 2.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1. Conform to ADA Guidelines; ANSI 117.1 for accessibility requirements. 2.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install demountable partition components until building is enclosed and finishing operations are complete, including ceiling and floor -covering installation and painting. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.10 DOORS 1. Flush Wood Doors: Manufacturer's standard solid core door, sliding operation a. Door Thickness: 43 mm (1-11/16 inches) thick. b. Pressed high density fibreboard skin on both sides of door on particleboard core. c. Edging: Solid edging d. Stile Width for Glazed Door: 157 mm (6-3/16 inch). e. Door Height: As indicated on schedule f. Glazing: Tempered. 1/4" thick, Clear g. Finish: Match Architect's sample 2.11 DOOR FRAMES Sliding Door Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum frame single door, single continuous track mounted to demountable wall system and capable of reconfiguration without part replacement or damage to wall components. a. Frame Finishes: Clear -anodized aluminum; AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II. b. Frame Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. c. Door Module Size: As scheduled. d. Configuration: Header, jambs and pivot hardware. Single door frame width not to exceed 1524 mm (60 inch) wide module for Aluminum Doors and 1219mm (48inch) for Wood Doors. e. Self-supporting header and track, jambs, sliding door, and trackless at floor between jambs. DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 2220 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 f. Frame Height: Jambs shipped over length by 50 mm (2 inches) in height, for field cutting to suit opening height for proper alignment with adjacent frames. g. Factory notched and drilled jambs for ceiling track and manufacturer's standard header attachment. h. Extrusion Profile: Rectilinear. i. Frame and Track Construction: .1 Continuous extruded frame supported or drywall header section with concealed track mechanism. .2 Guide and alignment hardware for stabilization of door bottom. .3 Door secured in closed position on strike side of door. .4 Anti rack / lift hardware included in track assembly. j. Operation: Pneumatic slow down mechanism in door assembly mechanism to reduce travel velocity to near zero as door approaches its open and closed limit. Adjust as required after door installation. k. Seals: Manufacturer's standard. 1. Operation and configuration ADA compliant in both clear opening and opening force in accordance with ADA Guidelines 2. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard sliding door hardware, with pulls. 2.12 ACCESSORIES 1. Accessories and Brackets: a. Manufacturer's brackets, supports and accessories for complete installation of system's furniture components, architectural millwork, audio visual equipment, and paper accessories. b. Provide bracket design to enable other system furniture to mount to DIRTT walls, on or off module. 2.13 FABRICATION 1. Components: a. Fabricate components for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure -fit members that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings. Exceptions: Drywall ceiling, seismic applications and doors against base building require screw holes in base building for proper fastening. b. Fabricate for installation with continuous seals at floor and other locations where partition assemblies abut fixed construction and for installation of sound attenuation insulation in partition cavities. 2. Electrical, Communications, and Security System Components: Fabricate demountable partitions to accept electrical, communications, and security systems components specified in Division 26, 27, and 28. 2.14 FINISHES 1. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage during shipping. DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 2220 - 4 2 2 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Appearance of Finished Work: a. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved samples. b. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. c. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 2.15 INSTALLATION 1. Install demountable partition systems to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install system rigid, level, plumb, and aligned. 3. Apply finished face mounted tiles to framing. 4. Install continuous insulation in base trim cavity. 5. Install seals to prevent light and sound transmission at connections to floors, ceilings, fixed walls, and abutting surfaces. 6. Install doors and frames, glazing, and glazing frame assemblies securely anchored to partitions and with doors aligned and fitted. 7. Install and adjust door hardware for proper operation. 2.16 DEMONSTRATION 1. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain demountable partitions. END OF SECTION 10 2220 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 2220 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire -protection cabinets for the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers." 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing -in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface - mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. B. Shop Drawings: For fire -protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire -protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire -protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire -protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.5 SEQUENCING A. Apply vinyl lettering on field -painted fire -protection cabinets after painting is complete. FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Fire -Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire -resistance rating of walls where they are installed. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 FIRE -PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; 2. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc; 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet. D. Surface -Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet. F. Door Material: Steel sheet. G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. J. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire -protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked -enamel finish. 2. Break -Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet. 3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. 1. Identify fire extinguisher in fire -protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Silk-screened. 3) Lettering Color: Red. K. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked -enamel paint for the following: 1) Interior of cabinet and door 2. Color as selected by architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire -protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire -protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: 1. Fire -Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet. B. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire -protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi -recessed fire -protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break -glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire -protection cabinets, square and plumb. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire -protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire -protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire -protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire -protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory - finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire - protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire -protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 4 immi KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand -carried fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguishers. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND -CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. B. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type: UL -rated, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container, 10 Ib. nominal capacity. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install three fire extinguishers and cabinets in locations as directed by architect and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2 7 3 3 3 7 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 END OF SECTION 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 21 1313 - WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Fire -protection valves. 3. Sprinklers. 4. Alarm devices. 5. Pressure gages. B. Work description: 1. The work includes an addition to the existing wet -pipe sprinkler system serving remodeled office space. 2. Additional sprinkler heads shall be added to the existing layout to provide sprinkler coverage for the newly remodeled office space below the Access Ceiling Tile system. Contractor to design and confirm coverage and sizing such that an NFPA 13 compliant system is delivered. 3. Some concealed spaces are not sprinklered. Provide new sprinklers where needed. 4. Ensure the fire alarm equipment meets current requirements. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Wet -Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standard -Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure. B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a person qualified under RCW 18-270, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1. Obtain fire flow tests from the local jurisdiction or conduct a flow test to suit the requirements for a hydraulic design. C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water -service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. 2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. c. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. e. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard. f. Outdoor canopy areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 3. Minimum Density for Automatic -Sprinkler Piping Design: a. Light -Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500 -sq. ft. area. b. Ordinary -Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500 -sq. ft. area. c. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing. 5. Total Combined Hose -Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated: a. Light -Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm for 30 minutes. b. Ordinary -Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes. D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For wet -pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by a person qualified under RCW 18-270who is responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and certified designer. B. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable. C. Welding certificates. D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping." E. Field quality -control reports. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 - 2 3 3 3 1!1NMI 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire -hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a person qualified under RCW 18-270. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Standard Weight, Galvanized- and Black -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. B. Schedule 30, Galvanized- and Black -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135; ASTM A 795/A 795M, Type E; or ASME B36.10M, wrought steel; with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. C. Thinwall Galvanized- and Black -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, threadable, with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. D. Schedule 5 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Iightwall, with plain ends. E. Galvanized- and Black -Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard -weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 F. Galvanized and Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded. G. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. H. Malleable- or Ductile -Iron Unions: UL 860. I. Cast -Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125. J. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150. K. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9. L. Grooved -Joint, Steel -Pipe Appurtenances: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Corcoran Piping System Co. c. National Fittings, Inc. d. Shurjoint Piping Products. e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. f. Victaulic Company. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved -End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable -iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile -iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. 4. Grooved -End -Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel -pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts. M. Steel Pressure -Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM -approved, 175-psig pressure rating with steel housing, rubber O -rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure -seal tools. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: a. Victaulic Company. b. Tyco International. 2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free. 1. Class 125, Cast -Iron Flat -Face Flanges: Full -face gaskets. B. Metal, Pipe -Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18..2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.4 LISTED FIRE -PROTECTION VALVES A. General Requirements: 1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. B. Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. AFAC Inc. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. c. Anvil International, Inc. d. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. g. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. h. Fire -End & Croker Corporation. i. Fire Protection Products, Inc. j. Fivalco Inc. k. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. I. Groeniger & Company. m. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. n. Matco-Nlorca. o. Metraflex, Inc. p. Milwaukee Valve Company. q. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. r. NIBCO INC. s. Potter Roemer. t. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. u. Shurjoint Piping Products. v. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. w. United Brass Works, Inc. x. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. y. Victaulic Company. z. Viking Corporation. aa. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 3. Standard: UL 312. 4. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum. 5. Type: Swing check. 6. Body Material: Cast iron. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. C. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves: Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. e. United Brass Works, Inc. 2. Standard: UL 262. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 4. Body Material: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Threaded. D. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. b. American Valve, Inc. c. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. g. Hammond Valve. h. Milwaukee Valve Company. i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. j. NIBCO INC. k. Shurjoint Piping Products. I. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. m. United Brass Works, Inc. n. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Standard: UL 262. 3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. E. Indicating -Type Butterfly Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Fivalco Inc. c. Global Safety Products, Inc. d. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Shurjoint Piping Products. h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. i. Victaulic Company. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 - 6 7 3 9 3 ors E KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Standard: UL 1091. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly. b. Body Material: Bronze. c. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: a. Valve Type: Butterfly. b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer. 6. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single -circuit, supervisory switch visual indicating device. 2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES A. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. B. Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Affiliated Distributors. b. Anvil International, Inc. c. Barnett. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. e. Fire -End & Croker Corporation. f. Fire Protection Products, Inc. g. Flowserve. h. FNW. i. Jomar International, Ltd. j. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, inc. k. Kitz Corporation. I. Legend Valve. m. Metso Automation USA Inc. n. Milwaukee Valve Company. o. NIBCOINC. p. Potter Roemer. q. Red -White Valve Corporation. r. Southern Manufacturing Group. s. Stewart, M. A. and Sons Ltd. t. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. u. Victaulic Company. v. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES A. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. B. Alarm Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFAC Inc. b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. f. Victaulic Company. g. Viking Corporation. 2. Standard: UL 193. 3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation. 4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill -line attachment with strainer. 5. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping. 6. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping. C. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: a. AFAC Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 2. Standard: UL 1726. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check. 5. Size: NPS 3/4 6. End Connections: Threaded. 2.7 FIRE -DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Flush -Type, Fire -Department Connection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 a. AFAC Inc. b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. c. GMR International Equipment Corporation. d. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. e. Potter Roemer. 2. Standard: UL 405. 3. Type: Flush, for wall mounting. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 5. Body Material Corrosion -resistant metal. 6. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire -department sizes and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers. 7. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain. 8. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type. 9. Outlet: With pipe threads. 10. Body Style: Vertical. 11. Number of Inlets: Two. 12. Outlet Location Top. 13. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR." 14. Finish: Rough brass or bronze. 15. Outlet Size: NPS 4.. 2.8 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Branch Outlet Fittings: 1. Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. National Fittings, Inc. c. Shurjoint Piping Products. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL 213. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum 4. Body Material: Ductile -iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. 5. Type: Mechanical -T and -cross fittings. 6. Configurations: Snap -on and strapless, ductile -iron housing with branch outlets. 7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping. 8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain -end pipe, or threaded. B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: a. AGF Manufacturing Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 - 9 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 d. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory "listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile -iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded. C. Branch Line Testers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. b. Fire -End & Croker Corporation. c. Potter Roemer. 2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Brass. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet: Threaded. 7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped. 8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler. D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: a. AGF Manufacturing Inc. b. Triple R Specialty. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. d. Victaulic Company. e. Viking Corporation. 2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile -iron housing with sight glass. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded. E. Adjustable Drop Nipples: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: a. CECA, LLC. b. Corcoran Piping System Co. c. Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 - 10 1 1 tt KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Standard: UL 1474. 3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber 0 -ring seals. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Length: Adjustable. 7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded. F. Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fivalco Inc. b. FlexHead Industries, Inc. c. Gateway Tubing, Inc. d. Additional manufacturer's as approved 2. Standard: UL 1474. 3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling grid. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler. 2.9 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: 1. AFAC Inc. 2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 4. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 5. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. 6. Victaulic Company. 7. Viking Corporation. B. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum. 3. Match existing building system. C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat -Responsive Element: 1. Early -Suppression, Fast -Response Applications: UL 1767. 2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2 -inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application. D. Sprinkler Finishes: Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 -11 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Chrome plated. E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed -type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome -plated steel, one piece, flat. 2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome -plated steel, one piece, flat. F. Sprinkler Guards: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation. 2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Type:: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler. 2.10 ALARM DEVICES A. Alarm -device types shall match piping and equipment connections. B. Water -Flow Indicators: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ADT Security Services, Inc. b. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries. c. Potter Electric Signal Company. d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company. e. Viking Corporation. f. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc. 2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Water -Flow Detector: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Two single -pole, double -throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory -set, field - adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed. 5. Type: Paddle operated. 6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical. C. Valve Supervisory Switches: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 -12 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2C17036 a. Fire -Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company. b. Kennedy Vaive; a division of McWane, Inc. c. Potter Electric Signal Company. d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company. 2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Type: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Single -pole, double -throw switch with normally closed contacts. 5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 2.11 PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following]: 1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division. 2. Ashcroft, Inc. 3. Brecco Corporation. 4. WIKA Instrument Corporation. B. Standard: UL 393. C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4 -1/2 -inch diameter. D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum. E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICE -ENTRANCE PIPING A. No new scope 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13. C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic -restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13. D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 -13 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved -end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections. G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13. H. Install alarm devices in piping systems. I. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. J. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing. K. Fill sprinkler system piping with water. L. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire -Suppression Piping." M. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire -Suppression Piping." N. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 21 Section "Escutcheons for Fire - Suppression Piping." 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved -end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections. D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME 831.9. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 -14 3 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. H. Twist -Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain -end -pipe fitting. Rotate retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin. I. Steel -Piping, Pressure -Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure -seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. J. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. 1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized -steel pipe. K. Steel -Piping, Cut -Grooved Joints: Cut square -edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved -end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel -pipe joints. L. Steel -Piping, Roll -Grooved Joints: Roll rounded -edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved -end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel -pipe grooved joints. M. Steel -Piping, Pressure -Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressure -seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. N. Dissimilar -Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.4 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install listed fire -protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Install listed fire -protection shutoff vahves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire -department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve. C. Install check valve in each water -supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable -water -supply sources. D. Specialty Valves: 1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system. 2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain -line connection. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 - 15 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.5 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels. B. Install dry -type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet -type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid. 3.6 FIRE -DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install wall -type, fire -department connections. B. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire -department connection. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13. B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no Teaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. 4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Coordinate with fire -alarm tests. Operate as required. 6. Coordinate with fire -pump tests. Operate as required. 7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire -department equipment. C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 -16 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Piping between Fire -Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard -weight steel pipe with grooved ends; grooved -end fittings; grooved -end -pipe couplings; and grooved joints. B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings. C. Wet -pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller], shall be one of the following: 1. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, black -steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray - iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, galvanized -steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray -iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 3. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, black -steel pipe with plain ends; uncoated, plain -end - pipe fittings; and twist -locked joints. 4. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, galvanized -steel pipe with plain ends; galvanized, plain -end -pipe fittings; and twist -locked joints. 5. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, black -steel pipe with cut- or roll -grooved ends; uncoated, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved -end -pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.. 6. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, galvanized -steel pipe with cut -grooved ends; galvanized, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved -end -pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 7. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, black -steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints. 8. Thinwall black -steel pipe with roll -grooved ends; uncoated, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved -end -pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 9. Thinwall black -steel pipe with plain ends; uncoated, plain -end -pipe fittings; and twist - locked joints. 10. Thinwall black -steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded joints. 11. Schedule 5 steel pipe; steel pressure -seal fittings; and pressure -sealed joints. D. Standard -pressure, wet -pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 shall be one of the following: 1. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, black -steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray - iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. Standard -weight or Schedule 30, galvanized -steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray -iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 3. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, black -steel pipe with cut- or roll -grooved ends; uncoated, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved -end -pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 4. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, galvanized -steel pipe with cut -grooved ends; galvanized, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved -end -pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 5. Standard -weight] or Schedule 30, black -steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints. 6. Thinwall black steel pipe with roll -grooved ends; uncoated, grooved -end fittings for steel piping; grooved -end -pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 7. Thinwall black -steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and weldectjoints. Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 -17 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.11 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE A. Use sprinkler types i i subparagraphs below for the following applications: 1. Match existing building sprinkler head selection. END OF SECTION 21 1313 Wet -pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 1313 -18 Mal KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 0500 — HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work described in the project drawings and specifications are provided to show the owners intent on the mechanical systems. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide complete design -build services to fulfill the owner's intent and to comply with all codes, standards, laws, and ordinances. B. The mechanical work described in this division includes, but is not limited to the following systems: 1. Balanced Ventilation system 2. Heating and Cooling system 3. Controls and instrumentation 4. Condensate management 5. Included are any incidental items not shown, but necessary for a complete system. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit project data in accordance with Division 1. Individual sections within Division 23 indicate items to be submitted. Investigate the capacity and space requirements of the proposed equipment before submitting. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Contractor is to be thoroughly acquainted with the work involved and is to verify at site all measurements necessary for the proper installation of the work. B. Refer to architectural, structural, and electrical drawings for building construction and other details which affect the mechanical installation, and confer with all trades to properly coordinate work. Arrange to have visible portions of work (such as access doors, grilles, sprinkler heads, escutcheons, refrigerant piping connections, etc.) fit in and harmonize with the finish in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. In case of location conflict between trades, notify the Architect. His decision is final. No increase in the contract amount will be allowed due to changes due to location conflicts. C. Provide coordinated shop drawings, no smaller than 1/4" scale showing all trades within two months of award of contract. D. Use sufficient skilled workers of the journeyman level, and competent supervisors to insure a proper installation throughout the job. E. Comply with all applicable Federal and local codes and regulations. Codes and regulations shall take precedence over any materials or methods specified. F. Codes and Standards: HVAC General Conditions 23 0500 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 G. 2015 International Building Code with Washington State Amendments H. 2015 International Mechanical Code with Washington State Amendments I. 2015 Uniform Plumbing Code with Washington Amendments J. 2015 Washington State Energy Code K. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code L. ASHRAE 62.1-2010, 55-2004 M. Abbreviations contained in various sections of the specifications refer to the following organizations, societies and associations: N. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association O. ANSI American National Standards Institute P. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Q. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers R. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers S. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials T. AWS American Welding Society U. CS Commercial Standards V. EEI Edison Electrical Institute W. FM Factory Mutual X. NBFU National Bureau of Fire Underwriters Y. NEC National Electrical Code Z. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association AA. NFPA National Fire Protection Association BB. OSHAOccupational Safety and Health Administration CC. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association DD. UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. EE. Fees and Permits: Permit and permit fees by owner. FF. All pressure vessels, safety devices and appurtenances shall bear an ASME stamp. HVAC General Conditions 23 0500 - 2 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 GG. All electrical devices and wiring shall comply with the standards of NEC. All devices shall be UL listed and so identified. 1.4 DRAWINGS A. The drawings are essentially diagrammatic and do not show all offsets required. Make field measurements and prepare shop drawings to insure all components fit into the space provided. B. The arrangement of equipment and piping has been based on items of equipment of a specific manufacture which are typical of the several makes that may be listed. If the equipment selected by the Contractor varies in from the details on the drawings, contractor shall be responsible to coordinate any changes. C. Coordinate the work with other trades and specification divisions. Ductwork has precedence over piping. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Completely cover motors and other moving machinery to protect from dirt and water during construction. B. Cap all openings in ductwork to protect against entry of foreign material. HVAC equipment is not to be operated until all dust -creating construction activities in the building are completed. C. Protect premises and work of other divisions from damage arising out of installation of work in this division. D. Perform work in manner precluding unnecessary fire hazard. E. Protect material, equipment, and apparatus under this division from damage, water, dust, and freezing, both in storage and installed, until final acceptance. Provide temporary storage facilities for materials and equipment. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Comply with Division 1 and the following B. Provide a minimum of one year warranty on parts and labor. This warranty shall be in addition to any manufacturer's warranty that may be for less than one year. 1.7 PROJECT CLOSEOJT A. Use cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of surface to be cleaned and follow directions on container. B. Vacuum clean diffusers, grilles, registers, louvers, and screens after all construction is complete. Sweep up all debris from mechanical rooms and remove from the site. C. Clean all mechanical equipment to remove dust, grease, and fingerprints. HVAC General Conditions 23 0500 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Provide maintenance manuals, guarantees, inspection certificates, and record drawings in accordance with Division 1. IMO E. Upon completion of the project, after cleaning is complete and before project is air balanced, provide clean air filters throughout. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials required for Division 23 are specified in the individual sections. B. All materials must be new and of the latest model of manufacture. C. Source: Where several items of the same type are required, such as air handlers and fans, all shall be of the same manufacture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Obtain approval from the Building Official and all required permits before proceeding with work in this division. B. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations unless specifically directed otherwise. 3.2 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protect material, equipment, and apparatus provided under this division from damage, water, dust, and freezing, both in storage and installed, until final acceptance. Provide temporary storage facilities for material and equipment. 2 3.3 SLEEVES AND INSERTS A. Locate and install sleeves, inserts and supports during the stages of construction. Make minor changes in the ductwork, piping, and other equipment locations due to structural obstructions or conflicts with work specified in other divisions. 3.4 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate roof penetration locations with General Contractor. B. Include air tight weather hood for any roof penetrations. 3.5 CUTTING, DRILLING AND PATCHING HVAC General Conditions 23 0500 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 A. Provide openings required in the existing construction for mechanical work. Use skilled mechanics of the proper trade. Core drilling and/or saw cutting shall be used. Use of jackhammer is specifically prohibited. 3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Comply with Division 1 and the following: B. Furnish an operation and maintenance manual for each item of equipment_ Furnish four copies of the manual, bound in hardback binders, or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual prior to the time that equipment tests are performed, and furnish the remaining manuals before the contract is completed. C. Cover is to have inscribed the following identification: the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the contract number. The manual shall include name, address and telephone number of each subcontractor installing equipment, and of the local representatives for each item of equipment. D. The manual shall have a table of contents and be assembled to conform to the table of contents with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. E. The manual shall include: 1. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 2. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment. 4. Procedure for starting. 5. Procedure for operating. 6. Shutdown operations. 7. Installation instructions. 8. Maintenance instructions. 9. Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency. 10. Safety precautions, diagrams, and illustrations. 11. Test procedures. 12. Performance data. 13. Parts list which indicates sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and service organization which is reasonably convenient to the project site. F. The manual shall be complete in all respects for equipment, controls, accessories, and associated appurtenances provided. END OF SECTION 23 0500 HVAC General Conditions 23 0500 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES A. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular rubber sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. B. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. 2.2 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non -shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout. 2.3 MOTORS A. Motor Characteristics: 1. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase. 2. Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP: Single phase. 3. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz. 4. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage for circuit voltage to which motor is connected. 5. Service Factor.. 1.15 for open drip -proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors. 6. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. 7. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 8. Enclosure: Unless otherwise indicated, open drip -proof. 9. Motors Used with Variable -Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger and Pipe Attachments: Factory fabricated with galvanized coatings; nonmetallic coated for hangers in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. C. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zinc -coated steel, with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DEVICES A. Vibration Supports: 1. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of oil- and water-resistant, neoprene of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match supported equipment. B. Vibration Hangers: 1. Elastomeric Hangers: Double -deflection type, with molded, of -resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Provide isolator with minimum 0.5 -inch static deflection. C. Seismic Restraints: 1. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. 2. Channel Support System: MFMA-4, shop- or field -fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion -resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. 3. Restraining Cables: Galvanized -steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and use two clamping bolts for cable engagement. 4. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors, seismic rated, zinc -plated carbon steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior locations. Provide anchor bolts with strength four times the Toad imposed as tested according to ASTM E 488. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOTOR INSTALLATION A. Anchor motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500 - 2 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.2 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Install piping free of sags and bends. B. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof slabs. D. Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Mechanical sleeve seals installed in steel or cast-iron pipes for wall sleeves. E. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for sealing pipe penetrations in fire -rated construction. F. Install unions at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.3 GENERAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. B. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems. C. Install powder -actuated fasteners and mechanical -expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is cured. Do not use in lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches thick. D. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. E. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non -insulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off - center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non -insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 4. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non -insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 5. Adjustable Swivel -Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non -insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. F. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. 3.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Adjust vibration isolators to allow free movement of equipment limited by restraints. B. Install resilient bolt isolation washers and bushings on equipment anchor bolts. C. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. END OF SECTION 23 0500 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500 - 4 3 J 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Aluminum, 0.032 -inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is Tess than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self -tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: White. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not Tess than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self -tapping screws. HVAC Piping & Equipment Identification 23 0553 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 8. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch bond paper„ Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8" thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Black. C. Background Color: White. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self -tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color -coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Pre -coiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self -Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent -adhesive backing. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. HVAC Piping & Equipment Identification 23 0553 - 2 ammo rn KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Flow -Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Sizes At least 1-1/2 inches high. 2.4 DUCT LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multillayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8" thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Black. C. Background Color: White. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not Tess than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Ilnclude secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self -tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow -Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels ori each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. HVAC Piping & Equipment Identification 23 0553 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color -Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "High -Performance Coatings." B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. C. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Condensate -Water Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. 2. Refrigerant Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black. 3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install plastic -laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1. Blue: For cold -air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. 3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed -air ducts. B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. END OF SECTION 23 0553 HVAC Piping & Equipment Identification 23 0553 - 4 ONE KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant -volume air systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. B. Certified TAB reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC NEBB or TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC NEBB or TABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing for HVAC 23 0593 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect or Commissioning Authority. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system -effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installled under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality -control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine terminal units, such as fan coil units, verify that they are accessible and controls are connected and functioning. Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing for HVAC 23 0593 - 2 L KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 J. Examine filters. Verify that startup filters are replaced by permanent filters with specified efficiency. K. Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. L. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system -readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical -power wiring is complete. 2. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in ASHRAE 111, NEBB`s "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper -control positions, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units. Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing for HVAC 23 0593 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommendled testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fart volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts. C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct -airflow measurements. D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust - air dampers through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. E. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. H. Check for airflow blockages. I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. J. Check for proper sealing of air -handling -unit components. K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts." 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air -handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air -handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing for HVAC 23 0593 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat - recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system -effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 6. Obtain approval from Architect or Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air -handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air -handling -unit performance. 7. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan - motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full -cooling, full -heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure air outlets and inlets without adjusting. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct -reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Adjust using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal -protection -element rating. Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing for HVAC 23 0593 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Motors Driven by Variable -Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR OUTDOOR VRF UNITS A. Verify proper rotation of fans and ensure fans are balanced B. Measure entering- and leaving -air temperatures. C. Record compressor data. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VRF INDOOR UNITS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature. 3.9 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.10 REPORTING A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.11 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing for HVAC 23 0593 - 6 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field -report data, include the following: 1 Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 3. Terminal units 4. Balancing statons. 5. Position of balancing devices. Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing for HVAC 23 0593 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. END OF SECTION 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing for HVAC 23 0593 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION 23 0700 - HVAC INSULATION SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data. B. Quality Assurance: Labeled with maximum flame -spread index of 25 and maximum smoke - developed index of 50 according to ASTM E 84. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. B. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. C. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. D. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory -applied FSK jacket. E. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, Grade A, with factory -applied ASJ. F. Mineral -Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB; and having factory -applied FSK jacket. Nominal density is 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k -value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or Tess. G. Polyolefin Insulation: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials. H. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -24179A, Type II, Class I. I. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A. J. Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. K. Factory -Applied Jackets: When factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. HVAC Insulation 23 0700 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 L. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements of the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association's "National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards" for insulation installation on pipes and equipment. B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. C. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall, Partition, and Floor Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations. Seal penetrations. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." D. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation: 1. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. E. Mineral -Fiber Insulation Installation: 1. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor -barrier mastic and joint sealant. 2. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. 4. Blanket and Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 5. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. F. Polyolefin Insulation Installation: 1. Seal split -tube longitudinal seams and end joints with adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. G. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Concealed and exposed supply and outdoor air. HVAC Insulation 23 0700 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Concealed and exposed return air located in unconditioned space. 3. Concealed and exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. H. Plenums and Ducts Not Insulated: 1. Metal ducts with 1" duct sound -lining. 2. Factory -insulated plenums and casings that meet section 3.2-B. 3. Flexible connectors. 4. Vibration -control devices. 5. Factory -insulated access panels and doors. I. Piping Not Insulated Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawlspaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.2 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Duct insulation in conditioned space shall comply with section C403.2.8 of the 2015 WSEC: 1. ERV Outside Air Intake: R-11 2. ERV Exhaust Air Out: R-7 3.3 HVAC REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Piping: Insulation shall comply with Table C403.2.9 of the 2015 WSEC: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick wall. 2. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick wall.. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick wall.. B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot -Gas Flexible Tubing: Insulation shall comply with Table C403.2.9 of the 2015 WSEC: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick wall. 2. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick wall. END OF SECTION 23 0700 HVAC Insulation 23 0700 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 0800 — COMISSIONING OF HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL A. SUMMARY B. The purpose of this section is to specify the Division 23 responsibilities and participation in the commissioning process. See Division 1, Section 01 9100, "Commissioning," for Contractor - related commissioning requirements. 1. Organization of the commissioning program is primarily the responsibility of the Commissioning Authority. Execution of the program is primarily the responsibility of the Contractor with support from the Division 23 contractor for: a. Testing and start-up of the mechanical equipment. b. Completion and endorsement of prefunctional test checklists provided by the Commissioning Authority to assure that Division 23 equipment and systems are fully operational and ready for functional testing. c. Providing qualified personnel to assist the Commissioning Authority with functional testing to verify equipment/system performance. d. Providing equipment, materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found during the commissioning process which fulfill contract and warranty requirements. e. Providing training for the systems specified in Division 23 with coordination of Owner by the Commissioning Authority. C. Division 23 Contractor shall cooperate with the Commissioning Authority in the following manner: 1. Allow sufficient time before final completion dates so that test and balance, controls point- to-point checkout, and functional testing can be accomplished. 2. Provide labor and material to make corrections when required without undue delay. 3. Put all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation, and continue the operation of the same during each working day of commissioning. D. Related Sections 1. Section 01 9100 — Commissioning 2. Division 22 - Plumbing 3. Division 26 - Electrical PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Standard certified test equipment for commissioning will be provided by the Commissioning Authority. Commissioning of HVAC 23 0800 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Proprietary lest equipment required by the manufacturer shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist the Commissioning Authority in the commissioning process. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORK PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING A. Specific pre -commissioning responsibilities of Division 23 are as follows: 1. Normal start-up services required to bring each system into a fully operational state. This includes motor rotational check, cleaning, filling, purging, control sequences of operation, leak testing, full -load and part -load performance, etc. 2. Normal testing, adjusting and balancing services required to verify each system is operating at design capacities. 3. Execute functional tests and complete prefunctional test checklists for the following equipment and systems: a. Variable refrigerant volume outdoor units b. Variable refrigerant volume indoor units c. Variable refrigerant volume hot water heating units d. Variable refrigerant volume piping, headers, and controls e. Variable refrigerant volume domestic hot water pumping and heat exchange systems f. Building exhaust g. Automated control systems B. Factory start-up services for key equipment and systems specified in Division 23. The Division 23 Contractor shall coordinate this work with the manufacturer and the Commissioning Authority. 3.2 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A. Provide skilled technicians to start-up and debug all systems within the Division 23 work (particularly with controls equipment). These same technicians shall be made available to assist the Commissioning Authority in completing the commissioning program as it relates to each system and their technical specialty. Work schedules, time required for testing, etc., will be requested by the Commissioning Authority and coordinated by the Contractor. Contractor will ensure the qualified technician(s) are available and present during the agreed upon schedules, and of sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and/or problem resolutions. 1. The Commissioning Authority reserves the right to judge the appropriateness and qualifications of the technicians relative to each item of equipment, system, and/or sub- system. Qualifications of technicians include expert knowledge relative to the specific equipment involved, adequate documentation and tools to service/commission the equipment, and an attitude/willingness to work with the Commissioning Authority to get the job done. A liaison or intermediary between the Commissioning Authority and qualified factory representatives does not constitute the availability of a qualified technician for purposes of this work. Commissioning of HVAC 23 0800 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3.3 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES A. Maladjustments, misapplied equipment, and/or deficient performance under varying loads will result in a system that does not meet Acceptable Performance. Correction of work will be completed under the direction of the Architect, with input from the Contractor, Equipment Supplier, and Commissioning Authority. Whereas all members will have input and the opportunity to discuss, debate, and work out problems, the Architect/Engineer-of-Record will have final jurisdiction on the necessary work to be done to achieve performance and/or design intent. 3.4 SEASONAL COMMSSIONING AND OCCUPANCY VARIATIONS A. Seasonal commissioning pertains to testing under full -load conditions during peak heating and peak cooling seasons, as well as part -load conditions in the spring and fall. Initial commissioning will be done as soon as contract work is completed regardless of season. All equipment and systems will be tested and commissioned in a peak season to observe full -load performance. Heating equipment will be tested during winter design extremes. Cooling equipment will be tested during summer design extremes with a fully occupied building. The Contractor will be responsible to participate in the initial and the alternate peak season test of the systems required demonstrating performance. B. Subsequent commissioning may be required under conditions of minimum and/or maximum occupancy or use. All equipment and systems affected by occupancy variations will be tested and commissioned at the minimum and peak Toads to observe system performance. The Contractor will be responsible to participate in the occupancy sensitive testing of systems to provide verification of adequate performance. 3.5 TRAINING A. The Division 23 Contractor will be required to participate in the training of the Owner's engineering and maintenance staff for each mechanical system and the related components. Training may be conducted in a classroom setting, with system and component documentation, and suitable classroom training aids, or in the field with the specific equipment. The type of training will be per the Owner's option. END OF SECTION 23 0800 Commissioning of HVAC 23 0800 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 0993 — SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The control system and mechanical equipment for this project shall be selected and set up to allow for the sequence of operations described in this section using a central Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) control system for scheduling Heat Pump fan coils and ERV fans. B. New VRF heat pump system and additional DOAS ERV system shall be integrated into the existing VRF control system. Contractor to assume all necessary components and communication to connect to existing VRF system. C. Contractor shall review design and attached sequence and notify design team of any errors, conflicts, inconsistencies, or other issues which will not allow for the successful achievement of the sequence of operations described here. D. General contractor shall coordinate with HVAC, electrical, plumbing sub to clearly establish roles and responsibilities associated with delivery of the work described in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. HVAC contractor shall rewrite sequence of operations for their programmers and using their nomenclature. Submut copy of this sequence for review. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Mechanical Ventilation: The building shall be ventilated via an Energy Recovery Ventilation (ERV) system. The printing room and other selected spaces are continuously exhausted during occupied hours through the ERV. Outside air is tempered through the ERV and delivered to the regularly occupied spaces. The ERV shall be controlled via the existing VRF controls package. The flow rate of the ERV shall be set per scheduled nominal airflow. Motorized dampers on the outside air connections to the ERV shall close automatically when the ERV is not in use. The ERV return ductwork shall consist of a CO2 sensor for ECM fan control; Fan shall run at high speed setting when CO2 sensor reads 1100 ppm and above and shall reset to medium speed when sensor reads 800 ppm or below. B. Heating and Cooling: The heating and cooling system is based on the use of a heat recovery Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) multi -head split system heat pump system. One outdoor heat pump unit shall be located on the roof, and indoor units and branch controller will be in the occupied space. T -stats will be in the zone served by each indoor unit. See mechanical plans for details on indoor unit type and location. C. Controls: The VRF system shall come with manufacturer controls which shah control the VRF system and shall also act as a time -clock to activate the ERVs and outdoor air motorized dampers. The VRF controls shall be programmed to the same schedule as the existing building. Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 230993 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1.4 INITIAL SETTINGS A. Temperature Setpoints 1. Main building zones: a. Occupied hours - Season 1: 72 Auto Mode (± 3F deadband) Season 2: 74 Auto Mode (± 3F deadband) b. Unoccupied hours - Heat 63°F, Cool 85°F. B. Schedule (confirm with client before acceptance) 1. Season 1: October through May 2. Season 2: June through September 3. Monday -Friday: Occupied 7AM-6PM 4. Saturday -Sunday: Unoccupied 5. Federal Holidays: Unoccupied 1.5 CONTROL LOGIC A. General: Ali setpoints, limits, etc. are adjustable through the central VRF control system B. System off 1. On command from VRF Control system (based on occupancy schedule) C. System on: 1. On Command from VRF Control system (based on occupancy schedule) 2. On manual over -ride a. Individual heat pumps can provide after hours operation via occupant over -ride at thermostats. D. VRF System: 1. The VRF system manufacturer shall provide auxiliary controls and programming to operate the system as described in sequence. 2. Outdoor Unit a. Cycle to meet space loads of individual indoor zones. 3. Indoor Units (Ductless Wall Cassettes): a. Indoor units will cycle to meet space setpoint as determined by the occupancy schedule. Thermostat locations are shown on plans, coordinate with architect. b. Temperature sensing shall be done at the thermostat. 4. Indoor Units (Ceiling Cassettes): a. Indoor units will cycle to meet space setpoint as determined by the occupancy schedule. b. ERV ventilation air is ducted separately to a dedicated ceiling diffuser and not connected to the fan coil vent port. c. Temperature sensing shall be done at the thermostat. Thermostat locations are shown on plans, coordinate with architect. 5. ERV control and outside air dampers controls: a. VRF control system to control ventilation system as well as outside air mechanical dampers for fresh air and building exhaust. Coordinate with electrical for any transformer needs. E. Thermostat and Central VRF Controls: 1. All thermostats must be able to provide a single setpoint with automatic changeover with deadband as listed above in section 1.4a. VRF controller interface shall allow for 2 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 230993 - 2 j :141 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March S, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 seasons to be programmed as the defaults for all heat pump zones. Simple up/down temperature overrides shall be allowed in all zones. F. ERV -1 1. The supply and exhaust fans shall run continuously during occupied hours and shall be off during unoccupied hours per schedule above. 2. Balance flows per scheduled airflows on extra high speed. 3. Enable Demand Control Ventilation(DCV) sequence via CO2 sensor in exhaust airstream. G. Exclusions: 1. There are no lighting controls interface with this HVAC control sequence. Lighting controls are handled under electrical/lighting contractor. END OF SECTION 23 0993 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 230993 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 2300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ASME B31.5, 'Refrigerant Piping," and with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L and ASTM B 280, Type ACR. 1. PDM — pre -insulated copper roll 1 "-thick wall Part # F100GUSxxx0100 B. Wrought -Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. E. Refrigerant: ASHRAE 34, R -410A. F. ACCESSORY: Braided flexible refrigerant piping 1. Metraflex. 2. Or approved equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping installation requirements. B. Install braided flexible refrigerant piping per manufacturers installation instructions for roof - mounting VRF systems. See detail. C. Install wall penetration system at each pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for wall penetration systems. D. Install refrigerant piping and charge with refrigerant according to ASHRAE 15. E. Belowground, install copper tubing in PVC conduit. Vent conduit outdoors. Refrigerant Piping 23 2300 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 F. Insulate suction lines to comply with Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." G. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot -gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. H. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R -410A A. Suction Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed or drawn -temper tubing and wrought -copper fittings with brazed joints. B. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn -temper tubing and wrought - copper fittings with brazed joints. END OF SECTION 23 2300 Refrigerant Piping 23 2300 - 2 3 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 3100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Productdata for dampers and shop drawings detailing duct layout and including locations and types of duct accessories, duct sizes, transitions, radius and vaned elbows, special supports details, and inlets and outlet types and locations. B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." C. Comply with UL 181 for ducts and closures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTS A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot -dip galvanized coating. B. Joint and Seam Tape, and Sealant: Comply with UL 181A. C. Rectangular Metal Duct Fabrication: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Fibrous -Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124. 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Airstream surface coated with an antimicrobial erosion -resistant coating. 3. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Volume Dampers and Control Dampers: Single -blade and multiple opposed -blade dampers, standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications; factory fabricated and complete with required hardware and accessories. B. Flexible Connectors: Flame -retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. C. Flexible Ducts: Factory -fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1 -inch - thick, glass -fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner complying with UL 181, Class 1. HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 3100 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Outdoor, Supply -Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 2. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 3. Outdoor, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2 -Inch wg: Seal Class A. 6. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 7. Unconditioned Space, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 8. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2 -Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2 -Inch wg: Seal Class B. 10. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Return -Air Ducts: Seal Class C. C. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces. D. Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. E. Support ducts to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Hangers and Supports." F. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. G. Install volume and control dampers in Tined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid erosion of duct liner. H. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. 3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Balance airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals to indicated quantities. END OF SECTION 23 3100 HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 3100 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 3300 — HVAC DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Flange connectors. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct -mounted access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Flexible ducts. 9. Duct accessory hardware. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control damper installations. d. Fire -damper and smoke -damper installations, including sleeves; and duct -mounted access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. C. Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements. HVAC Duct Accessories 23 3300 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 D. Dampers shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 5 years. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed -Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1 -side bright finish for exposed ducts. D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainlless-steel ducts. F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 4. Ruskin Company. B. Description: Gravity balanced. C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm. D. Maximum System Pressure: 2 -inch wg. E. Frame: 0.052 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange. F. Blades: Multiple single -piece blades, center -pivoted, maximum 6 -inch width, 0.025 -inch- thick, roll -formed aluminum with sealed edges. G. Blade Action: Parallel. H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked. HVAC Duct Accessories 23 3300 - 2 is Eit IMO KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2C17036 I. Blade Axles: 1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch. J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings. M. Accessories: 1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring -assist kits for vertcal airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mountng: Front mounted in sleeve. a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 -gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum. 6. Screen Material: Galvanized steel. 7. Screen Type: Bird. 8. 90 -degree stops. 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturer& Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. McGill AirFlow LLC.. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. d. Ruskin Company. e. Trox USA Inc. f. Young Regulator, Co 2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Hat -shaped, galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 -inch minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. HVAC Duct Accessories 23 3300 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 d. Galvanized -steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METALAIRE, Inc. f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. h. Ruskin Company. i. Trox USA Inc. j. Vent Products Company, Inc. k. Young Regulator, Co 2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: Hat -shaped, 0.10 -inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Roll -Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10 -inch- thick aluminum sheet. e. Extruded -Aluminum Blades: 0.050 -inch- thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal. 7. Bearings: a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. C. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc -plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 -inch- thick zinc -plated steel, and a 3/4 -inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. HVAC Duct Accessories 23 3300 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Ruskin Company. 5. Young Regulator Company. B. Frames: 1. Angle shaped. 2. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. 3. Mitered and welded corners. C. Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 2. Opposed -blade design. 3. Galvanized steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick. 5. Blade Edging: Closed -cell neoprene edging. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seat blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. D. Blade Axles: 1/2 -inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade -linkage hardware of zinc -plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. Bearings: 1. Molded synthetic. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to comptlance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Description: Add-on or roll -formed, factory -fabricated, slide -on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. HVAC Duct Accessories 23 3300 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. 2.6 TURNING VANES 1 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCO Incorporated. 5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil -shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous -glass fill. C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin -bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." E. Vane Construction: Single wall. 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a,division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2 -3/4 -inch- wide, 0.028 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 -inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf/inch in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling. HVAC Duct Accessories 23 3300 - 6 1 ist ..I 1 3 1 TOO 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2 -ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg positive and 1.0 -inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2 -ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring - steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor -barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg positive and 1.0 -inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. 4. Insulation R -value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. D. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium -plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm -gear acton in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. 2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct -insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. HVAC Duct Accessories 23 3300 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. H. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands plus tape. I. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 23 3300 HVAC Duct Accessories 23 3300 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 3713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and color charts for factory finishes. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLETS AND INLETS A. Square Ceiling Supply Grilles: 1. Products: a. Shoemaker 700 MA T -bar Diffuser. b. Or equivalent 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Mounting: T -bar. 5. 2x2 panel, with diffuser sizes shown on drawings. B. Wall Supply Grilles: 1. Products: a. Shoemaker 903 Airfoil Supply Grille. b. Or equivalent 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Mounting: Flush Mount. 5. See drawings for sizes. C. Round Duct Mounted Supply Diffuser 1. Products: a. Shoemaker RD Round Duct Mounted Supply Diffuser. b. Or equivalent 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.. 4. Mounting: Flush mount. 5. See drawings for sizes. D. Spot Diffuser: Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 3713 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1. Products: a. SEIHO PK -E Spot Diffuser or Shoemaker Equivalent, no grille dampers b. Or equivalent 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Brushed Aluminum. 4. Mounting: Duct Mount. 5. See drawings for sizes. E. Ceiling Return Grilles: 1. Products: a. Shoemaker 830 Perforated T -Bar Return Grille. b. Or equivalent 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Mounting: Lay in. 5. 2x2. F. Wall Return Grilles: 1. Products: a. Shoemaker 915 Airfoil Return Grille. b. Or equivalent 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Mounting: Flush mount. 5. See drawings for sizes. G. Filter Return Grilles: 1. Products: a. Shoemaker 920 FG Series Fixed Steel Blade Filter Grille. b. Or equivalent 2. Material: Steel. 3. Hand operated lever for easy filter access. 4. Steel filter retention tabs for 2" MERV 8 filter. 5. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 6. Mounting: Lay in. 7. Sizes shown on drawings. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 3713 - 2 .14 • 2 INS 1 1 7 IWO KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel unless otherwise indicated. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 23 3713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 3713 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 7219 — FIXED PLATE AIR TO AIR ENERGY EXCHANGERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes fixed plate air to air energy recovery ventilators and accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, Toads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGED AIR TO AIR ENERGY EXCHANGER A. Manufacturers: 1. Mitsubishi 2. Or approved equal. B. Description: Factory -packaged and tested units, ETL listed, UL 1995/1812, AHRI 1060, PA C. Efficiency: Comply with scheduled efficiencies. 69% temperature recovery efficiency, 64% enthalpy recovery efficiency. D. Fan Motors: ECM Fan Motors with variable speed control. Combined with fans, achieve maximum 1.1 Watt/CFM or provide heat exchange core with maximum 0.3" SP at scheduled air flows. Fixed Plate Air to Air Energy Exchangers 23 7219 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 E. Demand Controlled Ventilation: Install duct mounted CO2 sensor in return air stream and control via PZ-60DR Lossnay ERV Remote Controller. F. Size: ERV box volume of unit shall not exceed specified size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Suspend units from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Install new filters for each unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion. D. Connect supply, return, outside air, and exhaust ducts to units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections. E. Units shall be stored and handled per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty for parts and labor that units are free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for 18 months after shipment. B. Provide warranty for parts only for 20 years that units shall not become unusable for providing breathable air due to rust, rot, or corrosion due to exposure to liquid water. END OF SECTION 23 7219 Fixed Plate Air to Air Energy Exchangers 23 7219 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 23 8126 — VRF SPLIT -SYSTEM HEAT PUMP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes split system variable refrigerant flow (VRF) heat recovery heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator -fan and compressor -condenser components, refrigerant piping, refrigerant flow control devices for heat recovery, and controls. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be able to operate in any mode independently of other indoor units or groups. The system shall be capable of changing mode (cooling to heat, heating to cooling) with no interruption to system operation. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled. B. This project is a continuation of the existing project and requires integration with existing Mitsubishi R2 VRF controls. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. The units shall be manufactured in a certified ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility. C. All wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC. D. The units shall be ETL listed and labeled. E. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15/34, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." VRF Split -system Heat Pump 23 8126 -1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. G. The units shall be delivered with a full refrigerant charge of R -410a. 1.5 WARRANTY A. VRF equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer's limited warranty for a period of one year from date of substantial completion. An extended warranty including 2 years parts and 6 years compressor shall be granted upon submission to the manufacturer and acceptance by the manufacturer of proper installation with documentation including: 1. Selection output and layout of the VRF system. 2. 150 minutes of operational history upon commissioning from the VRF service tool. 3. Completed commissioning report as per the VRF equipment manufacturer. B. During this period, any part failing to function properly due to faulty workmanship or material shall be repaired or replaced at the VRF and shall not include labor, which shall be covered by the mechanical contractor. C. The VRF system shall be installed by an installer trained by the VRF equipment manufacturer. Installation and commissioning training shall be required and performed by the manufacturer. The labor shall be warranted for a period of one year from date of substantial completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mitsubishi (scope of TI requires integration with existing buildings Mitsubishi VRF system) 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED 2.2 INDOOR UNITS A. Wall -Mounted, Evaporator -Fan Components: 1. The indoor unit shall be used with VRF components of the same manufacturer. 2. Cabinet: Enameled steel panels with removable panels on front and ends, and discharge drain pans with drain connection. 3. Multi -directional refrigerant (4 options) and condensate drain (2 options) connections shall be standard. 4. The indoor unit shall attach to a separate back plate that will secure the unit to the wall. The back -plate will include piping and wiring templates to allow tidy installation with concealed piping, and wiring. 5. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, grooved on inner surface, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal -expansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240. Coil shall be factory pressure tested and designed for use with R -410A and factory charged with dry nitrogen gas. 6. Fan Motors: VRF Split -system Heat Pump 23 8126 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." b. Multitapped, 4 -speed (low, med, highl and high2) with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. c. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. d. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. e. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. 7. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 8. Sweeping guide vane shall be factory installed allowing the ability to control the direction of airflow from side to side. A motorized air sweep louver shall provide an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution. 9. Air Filtration Section: a. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section: 1) Comply with NFPA 90A. 2) Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2. 3) Filter -Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum. b. Disposable Panel Filters: 1) Factory -fabricated, viscous -coated, flat -panel type. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3) Mery according to ASHRAE 52.2: 8. 4) Electrical: The unit electrical power shall be single connection 208 volts, 1 - phase, 60 hertz. 5) The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz). 10. Controls: 1) This unit shall use controls provided by the VRF system manufacturer to perform functions necessary to operate the system. Factory controls shall allow separate heating and cooling setpoints with individual deadbands and setbacks for heating and cooling. Factory controls shall allow the room temperature setpoint to be sensed at the room controller. Factory controls shall be able to perform all functions described in the sequence of operations B. 4 -Way Ceiling Recessed Cassette with Grille Indoor Unit 1. General: The four-way cassette style indoor unit shall recess into the ceiling with a ceiling grille. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3 - minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. 2. Unit Cabinet: VRF Split -system Heat Pump 23 8126 - 3 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 1) The cabinet shall be a compact 22-7/16" wide x 22-7/16" deep so it will fit within a standard 24" square suspended ceiling grid. 2) The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. 3) Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four- way throw. 3. Fan: 1) The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor. 2) The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3) The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, Low, Mid, and High. 4) The indoor unit shall have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4 -way airflow, 3 -way airflow, or 2 -way airflow. 5) The auto air swing vanes shall be capable of automatically swinging up and down for uniform air distribution. 4. Filter: 1) Return air shall be filtered by means of a Tong -life washable filter. 5. Coil: 1) The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. 2) The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3) All tube joints shall be brazed with phos -copper or silver alloy. 4) The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 5) A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6) The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise drain water 19-3/4" inches above the condensate pan. 7) Both refrigerant lines to the indoor units shall be insulated. 6. Electrical: 1) The unit electrical power shall be single connection 208 volts, 1 -phase, 60 hertz. 2) The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz). 7. Controls: 1) This unit shall use controls provided by the VRF system manufacturer to perform functions necessary to operate the system. Factory controls shall allow separate heating and cooling setpoints with individual deadbands and setbacks for heating and cooling. Factory controls shall allow the room temperature setpoint to be sensed at the room controller. Factory controls shall be able to perform all functions described in the sequence of operations VRF Split -system Heat Pump 23 8126 -4 { 4 mit OS NMI INN KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.3 STANDARD HEAT PUMP OUTDOOR UNIT A. General: 1. The outdoor unit shall be used with VRF components of the same manufacturer consisting of the outdoor unit, indoor units, y -branches and headers, and controls that allow for long communication wiring to support long piping runs totaling up to 3280 feet. 2. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, wired, and run tested. 3. The unit shall have a sound level rating no higher than 61 dBA. 4. Unit control boards shall perform all functions required to effectively and efficiently operate the VRF system and communicate in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to indoor units via RS485. 5. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator. 6. The outdoor unit shall have a high-pressure safety switch 7. The outdoor unit shall have over -current protection. 8. The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with an elevation difference of up to 328 feet above or below the indoor units. 9. The outdoor unit shall allow up to a total equivalent refrigerant piping length of 3280 feet. 10. The maximum length from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be up to 656 feet without traps. 11. The outdoor unit shall be able to operate in heating down to -4°F and up to 61°F ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. 12. The outdoor unit shall be able to operate in cooling down to 21°F and up to 110°F ambient temperature. 13. The outdoor unit shall have an oil separator and controls to ensure sufficient oil supply is maintained for the compressor. 14. Shall use R410A refrigerant. 15. All refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units shall be field insulated (1" thick wall insulation) including at piping support locations. 16. Installing contractor shall provide an approved set of vibration isolators for each piece of equipment. 17. Outdoor unit shall be mounted on spring isolators and include a braided flexible refrigerant piping connect to mitigate vibration transfer. Install per Mitsubishi recommendations for rooftop installations. B. Casing/Frame: 1. Shall be constructed with galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with a powder coat baked enamel paint. 2. The casing shall withstand the 960 -hour salt spray test per ASTM 8117. C. Compressor: 1. All outdoor unit frames shall be equipped with one VFD driven scroll compressor. 2. A crankcase heater shall be factory mounted on all compressors. 3. The compressor shall be completely variable from 5% to 105% of the rated capacity. 4. The compressor shall be equipped with an internal thermal overload. 5. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. D. Fan: 1. Each outdoor unit module shall be furnished with one direct drive, variable speed propeller type fans capable of normal operation from 0" to .24" WG external static pressure via dipswitch. 2. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be variable speed with a maximum speed up to 950 rpm. VRF Split -system Heat Pump 23 8126 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 3. All fan motors shall be mounted for quiet operation. 4. All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent human and debris from contact with moving parts. 5. The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow. E. Coil: 1. The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with louvered fins on copper tubing. 2. The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant Gold Fin with hydrophilic silica gel coating which passes an ASTM B117 corrosion resistance test of 1000 hours. 3. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. 4. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of a digitally controlled inverter driven scroll compressor. F. Electrical: 1. The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230V, 60 Hz, 3-phase. 2. The outdoor unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of +/- 10% rated voltage. 3. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. 4. The control circuit between the indoor units, heat recovery box and the outdoor unit shall be field supplied 24VDC completed using a 2 -conductor, stranded, shielded cable for the RS485 daisy chain communication. 2.4 Branch Circuit (BC) controllers A. General: If the manufacturer uses a branch controller, it shall meet the following specification. The BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers shall be specifically used with R410A R2 -Series systems. These units shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish. The BC Controller shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. This unit shall be mounted indoors, with access and service clearance provided for each controller. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of rated capacity. B. BC Unit Cabinet: 1. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel. 2. Each cabinet shall house a liquid -gas separator and multiple refrigeration control valves. 3. The unit shall house two tube -in -tube heat exchangers. C. Refrigerant 1. R410A refrigerant shall be required. D. Refrigerant valves: 1. The unit shall be furnished with multiple branch circuits which can individually accommodate up to 54,000 BTUH and up to three indoor units. Branches may be twinned to allow more than 54,000 BTUH. 2. Each branch shall have multiple two -position valves to control refrigerant flow. 3. Service shut-off valves shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation. 4. Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable refrigerant flow. VRF Split -system Heat Pump 23 8126 - 6 gia .s KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 E. Integral Drain Pan: An integral condensate pan and drain shall be provided. F. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. 2. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253V (230V/60Hz). 3. The BC Controller shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. 4. The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC completed using a 2 -conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer shall provide all controls required to operate the system as described in the sequences of operation as specified in Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls." B. Thermostat: 7 -day programmable wired wall to control indoor units. C. Scope of project to integrate additional VRF indoor/outdoor units into existing building GB -50A central controller. D. Scope of project shall add digital 10 board that shall allow the VRF controller to control the operation of the energy recovery ventilation (ERV -1) dedicated outdoor air system. E. Coordinate with KCHA IT/Maintenance department for installation of VRF software on KCHA owned laptop computer. F. Automatic -reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor. G. Include micro -condensate pumps (GOBI II or equivalent noise level 20 dBA at 3') on all heat pumps that require them. H. Include larger condensate pumps to gather all condensate collection, route to open site drain in existing building as shown on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator -fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. C. Install roof -mounted, compressor -condenser components on equipment supports specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium - plated fasteners. D. Install seismic restraints. VRF Split -system Heat Pump 23 8126 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 5, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 E. Install compressor -condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of 1 inch See Division 23 0500 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC." F. Install and connect pre -charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick -connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit. C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "HVAC Ducts and Casings" Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split -system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION 23 8126 VRF Split -system Heat Pump 23 8126 - 8 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 SECTION 260001 — BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CODE COMPLIANCE A. Conform to the NEC latest edition, including local jurisdiction electrical code and amendments to the NEC. B. Conform to the Washington State Energy Code (WSEC), including any local jurisdiction energy codes and amendments to the WSEC. C. Seismic Performance: Electrical equipment and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Study reports for Short Circuit, Coordination and Arc Flash studies. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Lighting control systems 2. Switchboards 3. Panelboards 4. Motor control centers 5. Power distribution unit (PDU) 6. Diesel engine generator 7. Static uninterruptible power supply (UPS) 8. Transfer switches 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. B. As -built drawings. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period: Minimum of one year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE AND CABLE A. Aluminum and Copper Building Wire 1. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, current -carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. Conductor insulation: Types THHN, THWN-2, and XHHW-2. B. Metal -Clad Cable, Type MC 1. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current -carrying insulated conductors in an overall interlocked steel or aluminum metallic sheath. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260001 - 1 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors Aluminum, complying with ASTM B 800 and ASTM B 801. 3. Ground Conductor: Insulated. 4. Conductor Insulation: TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83; XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable -iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. 2.3 RACEWAYS A. Metal Conckiits and Fittings 1. Metal Conduit: GRC, IMC, EMT, FMC and LFMC. 2. Metal Fittings: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. B. Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings 1. Nonmetallic Conduit: ENT, RNC (Schedule 40) and LFNC 2. Nonmetallic Fittings: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. C. Metal Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters 1. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. 2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. C. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Color -Coding for conductors. 1. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 2. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. 3. Color for Neutral: White or gray. 4. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green. 5. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with white stripe. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260001 - 2 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 B. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Equipment to be labelled: a. Switchboards b. Feeder protection devices in switchboards c. Panelboards d. Transformers e. Disconnect switches f. UPS systems components g. Generator system components h. Other electrical equipment 2. Labels shall be white or black engraved letters on black or colored background. Colors shall differentiate voltage system or type of power (utility, generator backed, UPS, etc.) Provide schedule of proposed labels. 3. Information on labels shall include: a. Equipment name or load b. Voltage and Phase C. Self -Adhesive Labels for Receptacles: Vinyl, thermal, transfer -printed, self-adhesive, black letters on white background. Indicate panel and circuit number where indicated on the drawings. 2.6 STUDIES — Not used. 2.7 ELECTRICAL POWER METERING A. Provide microprocessor -based metering of electrical power distribution system(s) that includes electrical meters that monitor and connect to the building management system (BMS) data transmission network. B. Scope of metering shall be as indicated on the electrical drawings. Metering shall at a minimum provide load information for designated loads to meet the metering requirements detailed in the Washington State Energy Code, and in amendments to the WSEC made by local jurisdictions. C. Provide BMS compatible local metering module, complete with current transformers and control power input as required for a complete and operating system. Coordinate with the BMS provider/installer to integrate power metering into the BMS. c BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260001 - 3 Jim KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.8 NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM A. Provide a Digital Lighting management system compliant with current Washington State Energy Code (WSEC), and with applicable local jurisdiction energy codes. System shall provide multi- zone daylight harvesting controls, occupancy sensing controls, time -of -day sweep off controls, and shall be expanded to provide switched receptacle control as may be required by the WSEC. Lighting controls shall be compatible with existing system. 2.9 LOW -VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS — Not used. 2.10 SWITCHBOARDS — Not used. 2.11 PANELBOARDS — Not Used. 2.12 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES — Not Used. 2.13 WIRING DEVICES A. Straight -Blade Receptacles: Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. B. USB Charger Devices: Tamper -Resistant, USB Charger Receptacles: 12 V, 2.0 A, USB Type A. C. GFCI Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A, straight blade, feed -through type. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. D. Toggle Switches: Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; single -pole, two -pole, three-way, or four-way as required. E. Wall Switch Sensor Light Switch, Dual Technology: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting - control sensor and conventional switch lighting -control unit using dual technology. F. Wall -Box Dimmers: Modular, full -wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. 1. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer -ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. 2. LED Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with LED lamps; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. G. Wall Plates 1. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. a. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. b. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high -impact thermoplastic. c. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. d. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. e. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather -resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. H. Finishes 1. Device Color: White or as directed by the Architect. 2. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260001 - 4 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.14 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDUs) — Not Used. 2.15 ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING STATION — Not Used. 2.16 FUSES A. Coordinate fuse characteristics and ratings with utilization equipment requirements and nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size B. Coordinate fuse selections with system short-circuit and coordination studies. 2.17 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. Fusible Switches 1. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, horsepower rated with fuse clips or bolt pads, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. B. Non -Fusible Switches 1. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 2.18 MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Manual Motor Controllers 1. Motor -Starting Switches (MSS): "Quick -make, quick -break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on. 2. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers (FHPMC): "Quick -make, quick -break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped. B. Enclosed Full -Voltage Magnetic Motor Controllers 1. Description: Across -the -line start, electrically held, for nominal system voltage of 600- V ac and less. 2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Control Power: For on -board control power, obtain from line circuit or from integral CPT. The CPT shall have capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. C. Enclosures 1. Comply with NEMA 250, type designations as indicated on Drawings, complying with environmental conditions at installed location. 2. The construction of the enclosures shall comply with NEMA ICS 6. D. Accessories 1. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. a. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard -duty, except as needed to match enclosure type. Heavy-duty or oil -tight where indicated in the controller schedule. 2. Provide auxiliary contacts: two sets of isolated Form C contacts. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260001 - 5 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.19 DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR — Not Use. 2.20 UNINTERRUPIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM — Not Used. 2.21 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES — Not Used. 2.22 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES — Not used. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260001 - 6 7 1 3 3 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 2.23 LIGHTING FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to "Lighting Fixture Schedule" on the drawings for detailed specifications for interior and exterior fluorescent lighting, interior and exterior LED lighting and LED emergency and exit lighting, with associated ballasts, drivers and lamps. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. 3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. 3.5 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements. 3.6 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC or RNC, Type EPC -80 -PVC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC or RNC, Type EPC -40 -PVC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC -40 -PVC, direct buried or concrete encased as indicated on the drawings. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated. 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260001 - 7 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY March 15, 2018 Rice Fergus Miller Project No. 2017036 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 -inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. 3.7 TESTING A. Equipment: 1. Perform each visual, mechanical and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications; refer to NETA requirements. 2. Provide test reports. B. Circuit breakers: 1. Adjustable trip circuit breakers shall have all adjustable settings set in accordance with the recommended settings indicated in the project coordination study before testing. 2. All circuit breakers rated 200 amperes and larger shall be tested and demonstrated to operate within manufactures tolerances. 3. Provide test reports. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260001 - 8 Project Name Contractor: ABC Construction Schedule of Values Amount Charged to Period 1 Period 2 Period 3 Period 4 Period 5 Period 6 Period(s) (August) (September) (October) (November) (December) (January) Period 7 (February) Total 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 General Conditions Bond/Insurance Allowance for ODW Unit price wall sheeting Unit price roof sheeting Material use tax Project closeout Demolition Excavation Fence repair Landscap repair Concrete Roof framing Interior finish carpentry Railings Window sills Deck framing/coating Roofing Siding Demo Windows Siding Labor Siding Material Misc sheet metal entry doors/hardware Access doors Window material d rywa l l painting Signage Fire extinguishers Window converings Extend plumbing vents Electrical $ 104,976.00 $ 51,892.00 $ 100,000.00 $ 4,650.00 $ 9,000.00 $ 17,120.00 $ 5,000.00 $ 93,096.00 $ 1,520.00 $ 328.00 $ 2,188.00 $ 7,310.00 $ 135,486.00 $ 15,042.00 $ 30,709.00 $ 26,482.00 $ 37,173.00 $ 92,598.00 $ 38,256.00 $ 46,014.00 $ 144,800.00 $ 181,738.00 $ 23,082.00 $ 35,875.00 $ 1,680.QQ $ 48,891.00 $ 11,490.00 $ 71,500.00 $ 2,430.00 $ 2,030.00 $ 11,100.00 $ 2,830.00 $ 34,500.00 17,496.00 51,892.00 10,000.00 $ 1,800.00 $ 2,600.00 $ 3,500.00 $ 15,516.00 33,871.00 17,496.00 25,000.00 3,000.00 15,500.00 35,000.00 5,000.00 10,000.00 45,000.00 5,500.00 4,200.00 15,000.00 1,100.00 15,000.00 1,100.00 $ 17,496.00 0 $ 25,000.00 9,000.00 2,853.00 15,520.00 500.00 2,436.67 33,307.50 7,521.00 5,000.00 10,000.00 44, 000.00 10,000.00 15,000.00 32,450.00 45,434.50 5,770.50 11,958.33 10,000.00 3,000.00 2,030.00 1,730.00 8,625.00 17,496.00 20,000.00 2,300.00 $ 2,853.00 $ $ $ 2,436.67 33,307.50 7,521.00 15,309.00 10,000.00 10, 000.00 998.00 19,256.00 11,000.00 32,450.00 45,434.50 5,770.50 11,958.33 15,520.00 500.00 15,000.00 6,000.00 23,833.33 $ 8,625.00 $ 17,496.00 $ 10,000.00 $ 2,350.00 $ 2,853.00 $ $ $ 2,436:66 0 15,520.00 520.00 15,400.00 6,482.00 7,137.00 15,814.00 32,450.00 45,434.50 5,770.50 11,958.34 1,680.00 8,891.00 2,490.00 23,833.33 $ 8,625.00 $ 17,496.00 $ 10,000.00 3,761.00 5,000.00 15,520.00 328.00 2,188.00 0 32,450.00 44,334.50 5,770.50 $ 23,833.34 $ 2,430.00 $ 11,100.00 $ 8,625.00 104,976.00 51,892.00 100,000.00 4,650.00 9,000.00 17,120.00 5,000.00 93,096.00 1,520.00 328.00 2,188.00 7,310.00 135,486.00 15,042.00 30,709.00 26,482.00 37,137.00 92,598.00 38,256.00 46,014.00 144,800.00 181,738.00 23,082.00 35,875.00 1,680.00 48,891.00 11,490.00 71,500.00 2,430.00 2,030.00 11,100.00 2,830.00 34,500.00 Total Contract Amount Total Expended % of Total Balance to Finish % Until Expended 1,390,786.00 1,390,786.00 100.00% 0.00% Expected Outflow Per Period % of Tot Contract Per Period Actual Outflow Variance $ 136,675.00 $ 197,896.00 $ 318,632.50 $ 317,568.83 $ 237,141.33 $ 182,836.34 $ 9.8% 14.2% 22.9% 22.8% 17.1% 13.1% $ 152,068.00 $ 163,703.45 $ 320,000.00 $ 315,582.00 $ 350,650.00 $ 88,782.55 10% -21% - $ 1,390,786.00 0.0% 100.0% ATTACHMENT #1 PAY APPLICATION EXPEDITURE SAMPLE a King ���Coou�unty ATtriorT ATTACHMENT #2 SUBTITUTION REQUEST SUBSTITUTION REQUEST Project: To: Re: Sub. Request #: From: Date: A/E Project #: Contract For: Specification Title: Section: Description: Page: Article / Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone: History: ❑ New Product ❑ 2 - 5 years old ❑ 5 - 10 years old ❑ More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: ❑ Point -by -point comparative data attached - REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project: Architect: Address: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑ No ❑ Yes; explain: Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑ No ❑ Yes (If Yes): 0 Add 0 Deduct days. * If Contract time is to be extended, a Change Order must be prepared. Supporting Data Attached: 0 Drawings 0 Product Data 0 Samples 0 Tests 0 Reports 0 Page 1 of 2 KCHA-CCD 4197 02-26-14 urny MOW ut A SUBSTITUTION REQUEST The Undersigned certifies: Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. Payment will be made for changes to building design, included A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION ❑ Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 3300. ❑ Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 0 13300. ❑ Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. O Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: 0 Contractor 0 Subcontractor 0 Supplier 0 Manufacturer El A/E ❑ Page 2 of 2 KCHA-CCD 4197 02-26-14 5/31/2019 0 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development HEATH MAC COY 700 ANDOVER PARK W TUKWILA, WA 98188 RE: Permit No. D18-0076 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY 700 ANDOVER PARK W Dear Permit Holder: Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director In reviewing our current records, the above noted permit has not received a final inspection by the City of Tukwila Building Division. Per the International Building Code, International Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and/or the National Electric Code, every permit issued by the Building Division under the provisions of these codes shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work authorized by such permit has not begun within 180 days from the issuance date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work has begun for a period of 180 days. Your permit will expire on 7/9/2019. Based on the above, you are hereby advised to: 1) CaII the City of Tukwila Inspection Request Line at 206-438-9350 to schedule for the next or final inspection. Each inspection creates a new 180 day period, provided the inspection shows progress. -or- 2) Submit a written request for permit extension to the Permit Center at least seven(7) days before it is due to expire. Address your extension request to the Building Official and state your reason(s) for the need to extend your permit. The Building Code does allow the Building Official to approve one extension of up to 180 days. If it is determined that your extension request is granted, you will be notified by mail. In the event you do not call for an inspection and/or receive an extension prior to 7/9/2019, your permit will become null and void and any further work on the project will require a new permit and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sine rely, Ct uCL(es --%t Kandace Nichols Permit Technician File No: D18-0076 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 October 04, 2018 e City of Tukwila Department of Community Development HEATH MAC COY 700 ANDOVER PARK W TUKWILA, WA 98188 RE: Correction Letter # 1 to Revision #1 DEVELOPMENT Permit Application Number D 18-0076 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY - 700 ANDOVER PARK W Dear HEATH MAC COY, O Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the following departments: BUILDING DEPARTMENT: Allen Johannessen at 206-433-7163 if you have questions regarding these comments. • (GENERAL INFORMATION NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to a preferably maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size; larger sizes may be negotiable. "New revised" plan sheets shall be the same size sheets as those previously submitted.) "STAMP AND SIGNATURES" (If applicable) For Engineers: "Every page of a plan set must contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee(s) who prepared or who had direct supervision over the preparation of the work, and date of signature. Specifications that are prepared by or under the direct supervision of a licensee shall contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee and the date of signature. If the "specifications" prepared by a licensee are a portion of a bound specification document that contains specifications other than that of an engineering or land surveying nature, the licensee need only seal/stamp that portion or portions of the documents for which the licensee is responsible." It shall not be required to have each page of "specifications" (calculations) to be stamped and signed; Front page only will be sufficient (WAC 196-23-010 & 196-23-020). Architects: "date" only not required (WAC 308-12-081). (BUILDING REVIEW NOTES) 1. Plans provided do not have the signature of the architect on the stamp. Provide plan set with all sheets signed by the architect on the architect's stamp. See General Note above. Note: Contingent on response to these corrections, further plan review may request for additional corrections. Please address the comments above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) sets of revised plan pages, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a 'Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 October 04, 2018 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development HEATH MAC COY 700 ANDOVER PARK W TUKWILA, WA 98188 RE: Correction Letter # 1 to Revision #1 DEVELOPMENT Permit Application Number D 18-0076 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY - 700 ANDOVER PARK W Dear HEATH MAC COY, 0 Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the following departments: BUILDING DEPARTMENT: Allen Johannessen at 206-433-7163 if you have questions regarding these comments. • (GENERAL INFORMATION NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to a preferably maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size; larger sizes may be negotiable. "New revised" plan sheets shall be the same size sheets as those previously submitted.) "STAMP AND SIGNATURES" (If applicable) For Engineers: "Every page of a plan set must contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee(s) who prepared or who had direct supervision over the preparation of the work, and date of signature. Specifications that are prepared by or under the direct supervision of a licensee shall contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee and the date of signature. If the "specifications" prepared by a licensee are a portion of a bound specification document that contains specifications other than that of an engineering or land surveying nature, the licensee need only seal/stamp that portion or portions of the documents for which the licensee is responsible." It shall not be required to have each page of "specifications" (calculations) to be stamped and signed; Front page only will be sufficient (WAC 196-23-010 & 196-23-020). Architects: "date" only not required (WAC 308-12-081). (BUILDING REVIEW NOTES) 1. Plans provided do not have the signature of the architect on the stamp. Provide plan set with all sheets signed by the architect on the architect's stamp. See General Note above. Note: Contingent on response to these corrections, further plan review may request for additional corrections. Please address the comments above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) sets of revised plan pages, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a 'Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 Sincerely, --3;t1P--sAd, Bill Rambo Permit Technician File No. DI8-0076 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 8/1/2018 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development HEATH MAC COY 700 ANDOVER PARK W TUKWILA, WA 98188 RE: Permit Application No. D 18-0076 KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY 700 ANDOVER PARK W Dear HEATH MAC COY, Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director In reviewing our current application files, it appears that your permit applied for on 3/16/2018, has not been issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Per the International Building Code, International Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and/or National Electrical Code every permit application not issued within 180 days from the date of application shall expire and become null and void. Currently your application has a status of APPROVED and is due to expire on 9/16/2018. If you still plan to pursue your project, you are hereby advised to do one of the following: 1) If the plan review is complete for the project and your application is approved, you may pick up the application before the date of expiration. At the time of permit issuance the expiration date will automatically be extended 180 days. -or- 2) If the plan review is not completed submit a written request for application extension (7) seven days in advance of the expiration date. Address your extension request to the Building Official and state your reason(s) for the need to extend your application. The Building Code does allow the Building Official to approve one extension of up to 90 days. If it is determined that your extension request is granted, you will be notified by mail. In the event that we do not receive your written request for extension or request is denied, your permit application will expire and your project will require a new permit application, plans and specifications, and associated fees. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, chelle ipley Permit Technician ANTIIV) File No: D18-0076 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D18-0076 DATE: 10/30/18 PROJECT NAME: KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY SITE ADDRESS: 700 ANDOVER PARK W Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued X Response to Correction Letter # 1 X Revision # 1 after Perrr it Issued DEPARTMENTS: 1lV Building Division Public Works ❑ Fire Prevention Structural n Planning Divis'on ❑ Permit CoordiOtor PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable n (no approval/review required) DATE: 11/01/18 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 11/29/18 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Corrections Required ❑ Denied ❑ (corrections entered in Reviews) (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 pPEhMIT COORD COPY CI PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D18-0076 DATE: 10/29/18 PROJECT NAME: KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY SITE ADDRESS: 700 ANDOVER PARK W Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued Response to Correction Letter # _X Revision # 2 after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: tr Building Division Public Works ❑ Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division ❑ ❑ Permit Coordinator ❑ PRELIMINARY REVIEW: DATE: 10/29/18 Not Applicable ❑ Structural Review Required (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved DUE DATE: 11/27/18 ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Corrections Required ❑ Denied ❑ (corrections entered in Reviews) (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 OPERMIT COORD COP? Co PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D18-0076 DATE: 09/26/18 PROJECT NAME: KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY SITE ADDRESS: 700 ANDOVER PARK W Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued Response to Correction Letter* _X Revision # 1 after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: �S Corr . 47-(S At\ Liv$ 5!;-6-tg Building Division Fire Prevention Planning Division ,' 1 )L-A "'4- 90)1)-(6 Works Structural Permit Coordinator ❑ PRELIMINARY REVIEW: DATE: 09/27/18 Not Applicable ❑ Structural Review Required (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved DUE DATE: 10/25/18 ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Corrections Required 1 (corrections entered in Reviews Denied (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only t 1 CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: 10 Departments issued corrections: Bldg Fire 0 Ping 0 PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 c) PERMIT COORD COPY0 PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: 11)18-0076 DATE: 03/16/18 PROJECT NAME: KING COUNTY HOUSING AUTHORITY SITE ADDRESS: 700 ANDOVER PARK W X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Revision # before Permit Issued Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: -- C 3 a2--(8 Am J Building Division Fire Prevention11 bve\ MI A- ii_rD Public Works Structural ❑ Permit Coordinator ip Planning Division PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable ❑ (no approval/review required) DATE: 03/20/18 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: E APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 04/17/18 Approved Corrections Required ❑ Approved with Conditions Le ❑ Denied ❑ (corrections entered in Reviews) (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: S-1-1 CIF -C/ , 4-o 1. 0 REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 PROJECT NAME: SITE ADDRESS: PERMIT NO: N6" O�1 `0 ORIGINAL ISSUE DATE: �1�,971lol REVISION LOG REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS 1 ISSUED DATE , hi0 ' STAFF IWALS _ ' STAFF MAI'S '''1; 1 V4 I "N -[-�pW Summar of Revision: fait (44 1 A i f 't t l( %,.i II i A I it ' Le, Received by:Q Received by. REVISION DATE RECEIVED DATE RECEIVED STAFF INIALS ISSUED DATE Mk- 1� .QA A ( �11�/I ►1_ V STAFF IWALS _ ' /NO. !!gymRevision: O ijAI 1 V4 I "N -[-�pW Summary of r' Wit 4 f. ,a .I 11 .A11 it ' b OW Received by:Q (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: (please print) 0 City of Tukwila 0 REVISIO Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: LO/ D / l Plan Check/Permit Number: 0 I ' ^ 007 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # t Et Revision # l after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner ❑ Deferred Submittal # Project Name: t{L041 G614-(efk-C d' 1C1 P iCr--C Project Address: PAVZIC L.�ff l *Th..1c63I(44 Contact Person:N W...11 L Ck_iPiZ A Phone Number: go b. 7 4 JZ- l Q Summary of Revision: RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 3 0 2018 PERMIT CENTER Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision includin at of rIvisk Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: ❑ Entered in TRAKiT on W:\Permit Center\Templates\Forms\Revision Submittal Form.doc Revised: August 2015 b City of Tukwila 0 Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: I O-1. S".'--( € Plan Check/Permit Number: -- 00V (0 % e � It -I. -,I- ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # O Response to Correction Letter # ❑' Revision # after Permit is Issued IV Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner ❑ Deferred Submittal # Project Name: �� -jii,4!l ma ®tg-F--1« RA., 3c, tig mC�� Project Address:ti f� PA Jc— L/ ST ILA (Aid qg/chi Contact Person: r-{ (c 4, L C7.441044- Phone Numbe(2 /2./'( Summary of Revision: � l .• L II �r/&.J RECEIVED Q. OCT 2 5 2018 RMIT CENTER Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including ate of r • io . Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: Ef Entered in TRAKiT on 0 W:\Permit Center\TemplatealForm,\Revision Submittal Formdoc Revised: August 2015 0 City of Tukwila 0 Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: / ( 4 (( v Plan Check/Permit Number: Tl 0C G CQ Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # j Revision # 1 after Permit is Issued Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: kttcc CJt-( I -x A%--c,4l'c-e Project Address: ZOO AdQ1;),\J t,JvS r d a- vJ q Contact Person: t'1 lC (_ �' AfJetA Phone Number: (20i-) .5-7 moi- 121 Summary of Revision: O Atop d cJ LA1 .1O�.•.i t1�CA, s 1) 154:1 oFr-lcc__ D1fr-tf- 4 ot• r3-( 41-0 • Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision includin Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: ❑ Entered in Permits Plus on RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILI SEP 2 1 2018 PERMIT CENTER H:\ApplicationsTorms-Applications On Line \2010 Applications\7-2010 - Revision Submittal.doc Revised: May 2011 Pete Almond Dev Const LLC 0 Horne Espanol Contact Safety & Health Claims & Insurance 0 Washington State Department of Labor & Industries 0 [Search =&I Page 1 of 2 A -Z Index Help My Ltd Workplace Rights Trades & Licensing Pete Almond Dev Const LLC Owner or tradesperson Principals Almond, Peter Allen, PARTNER/MEMBER Doing business as Pete Almond Dev Const LLC WA UBI No. 602 951 368 207 Broadway Unit 300 TACOMA, WA 98402-4024 253-576-2102 PIERCE County Business type Limited Liability Company License Verify the contractor's active registration / license / certification (depending on trade) and any past violations. Construction Contractor License specialties GENERAL License no. PETEAAD918O2 Effective — expiration 09/22/2009— 09/22/2019 Bond CBIC Bond account no. Si4130 Active. Meets current requirements. $12,000.00 Received by L&I Effective date 09/22/2009 09/21/2009 Expiration date Until Canceled Insurance .................. Evanston Ins Co Policy no. 3C21955 $1,000,000.00 Received by L&I Effective date 09/20/2018 09/21/2018 Expiration date 09/21/2019 Insurance history Savings No savings accounts during the previous 6 year period. Lawsuits against the bond or savings No lawsuits against the bond or savings accounts during the previous 6 year period. L&I Tax debts No L&l tax debts are recorded for this contractor license during the previous 6 year period, but some debts may be recorded by other agencies. License Violations No license violations during the previous 6 year period. Help us improve https://secure.lni.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=602951368&LIC=PETEAAD91802&SAW= 09/24/2018